Electra Elite 48/192 Programming Manual

Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations from the
original printed document. When viewing and printing this document, we cannot
guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and your
individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly.

48/192
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Stock Number 750362
Issue 7
(Series 8000)

NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC America, Inc.
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered
trademarks of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Copyright 2003

NEC Infrontia, Inc.
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Technology Development

Preface
S
ECTION 1

ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The Programming Manual provides the technician with all of the necessary
information for programming the Electra Elite system.
Programming can be accomplished using a PC or a Multiline Terminal.

SECTION 2

MANUAL
ORGANIZATION
This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite
system.
Chapter 1  Multiline Terminal Programming
This chapter includes all of the Memory Blocks used to program the
system. Detailed programming instructions are provided for each Memory
Block.
Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming
This chapter includes a list by feature of the Memory Blocks necessary for
programming each feature.
Chapter 3 PC Programming
This chapter includes the instruction or programming using Electra Elite
PC software.
Programming Manual
i

Issue 7
Electra Elite
SECTION 3

SUPPORTING
DOCUMENTS
A set of manuals for the Electra Elite system provides all the information
necessary to install and support the system. Other manuals included in
the set are described below.
Electra Elite 48/192 Features and Specifications Manual (Stock
Number 750361)
This manual provides detailed information related to every feature
available in the system.
Electra Elite 192 General Description Manual (Stock Number 750360)
This manual provides general information about the system features,
configuration, and standards. An overview of the Electra Elite 192 system
that is useful when presenting information to potential customers is
provided.
Electra Elite 48 General Description Manual (Stock Number 750375)
This manual provides general information about the system features,
configuration, and standards. An overview of the Electra Elite 48 system
that is useful when presenting information to potential customers is
provided.
Electra Elite 192 System Hardware Manual (Stock Number 750363)
The System Hardware Manual is intended for the system installer and
provides detailed instructions for installing the Electra Elite 192 KSU,
ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional equipment.
Electra Elite 48 System Hardware Manual (Stock Number 750376)
The System Hardware Manual is intended for the system installer and
provides detailed instructions for installing the Electra Elite 48 KSU, ETUs,
Multiline Terminals, and optional equipment.
Electra Elite Least Cost Routing Manual (Stock Number 750364)
This manual provides instructions to the service technician for
programming the customer site for least cost routing.
ii
Preface

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Electra Elite Automatic Call Distribution Manual (Stock Number
750365)
This manual provides the service technician with instructions for
programming the ACD. This manual can also be used by the ACD
supervisor at the customer site to become familiar with the ACD/MIS
feature.
Electra Elite 48/192 Job Specifications Manual (Stock Number
750377)
This manual is intended to help the technician install and maintain the
Electra Elite system. Job specification worksheets are provided. When
these worksheets are completed, they provide all of the system
programming values and configuration information necessary to help
technicians maintain the system.
Elite ACD Plus Installation Manual (Stock Number 750359)
This manual provides general information about the Elite ACD Plus
features, installation procedures and feature programming. The NEC Elite
ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution card that supports up to 40
Agents and 12 supervisors at one time.
Electra Elite Wireless System Manual (Stock Number 750423)
This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and
programming procedures for the Electra Elite Wireless Communication
System (WCS).
Programming Manual
iii

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
iv
Preface

Chapter 1
Multiline Terminal
Programming

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xxii
List of Figures

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xxiv
List of Tables

Multiline Terminal
Programming
Chapter 1
S
ECTION 1

GENERAL
INFORMATION
A stored program controls the Electra Elite 48/192 system. When the
system is initially powered up, the MBD-U10 Unit/CPUB( )-U10 ETU,
respectively, scans all interface and ISA slots to determine the hardware
configuration. The system stores this information and the default values in
the resident system program memory. After initially powering up the
system, a trained technician can change the resident system program to
meet the specific needs of an individual customer.

SECTION 2

PROGRAMMING THE
SYSTEM

The battery on the CPU must be connected. When the
battery is not connected before programming begins, data
may be lost when a power outage occurs.
System data programming may be necessary when:
¥
the system is installed for the first time.
¥
components of an existing system are replaced.
¥
functions of an existing system are changed.
Programming Manual
1 - 1

Issue 7
Electra Elite
New Installation
Existing System
Develop System
Component
Function
Data Sheet
Replacement
Change
Installation
Rewrite System
Rewrite System
Data Sheet
Data Sheet
Test System with
Installation
Default Values
System Data
System Data
System Data
Programming (Note 1)
Programming (Note 2)
Programming (Note 3)
TEST
TEST
TEST
Note 1:
For a new installation, system default values are assigned when power is
turned on. Program the system data to be changed only.
Note 2:
For component replacement, program the relevant system data.
Note 3:
For function change, program the system data to be revised.
Figure 1-1 Programming Flowchart
2.1
Features of Programming
The following features are provided with Multiline Programming:
¥
The system operates from default after initial power-up.
Only the parameters that change must be programmed.
¥
System programming characters are displayed on the LCD of
the Multiline Terminal.
¥
Several types of system programming can be entered at the
same time.
¥
Data programmed for one telephone (e.g., Tenant Mode, or
Telephone Mode) can be copied to another telephone.
1 - 2
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
¥
Two Multiline Terminals, connected to ports 01 and 02,
respectively, can be used simultaneously for programming.
2.2
System Programming Modes
Modes and submodes are listed in Table 1-1 Programming Modes.

Table 1-1 Programming Modes
Line
Line
Mode Name
Submode Name
Key
Key
LK 1
CO Line
LK 2
ICM
LK 3
SLT
LK 4
Transfer/Automated Attendant
LK 5
SMDR/LCR
LK 6
DSS
LK 1
System Mode
LK 7
ESP
LK 8
PBR/Miscellaneous
LK 9
DISA
LK 10
Call by Call
LK 11
DTI
LK 12
ACD/UCD
LK 13
PRI
LK 14
LCR
LK 15
K-CCIS
LK 16
Hub
LK 2
Tenant Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 3
CO/PBX Line Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 4
Telephone Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 5
Trunk Group Mode
N/A
N/A
LK 2
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
LK 3
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
LK 6
Copy Mode
LK 4
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
LK 5
Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment
LK 1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
LK 7
ETU Mode
LK 2
Telephone Type Assignment
LK 3
MIF Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 3

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Table 1-1 Programming Modes (Continued)
Line
Line
Mode Name
Submode Name
Key
Key
LK 1
ROM Version Confirmation
LK 2
System Speed Dial Memory Clear
LK 8
Special Mode
LK 3
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear
LK 8
Second Initialization
2.3
Before Programming
The technician should check the ROM version and the port
numbers before programming the system.
2.3.1
Check Points
¥
Confirm the ROM Version
The available features depend on the ROM version.
Refer to Memory Block 8-1 (ROM Version
Confirmation), or from any idle Display Terminal,
pressTandC.
¥
Confirm the Port Number
Port numbers are used for system programming.
Refer to Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot
Assignment).
To confirm station numbers pressTandD. The
display indicates the station number and the port
number.
Station
Port
Number
Number
# # # = T E L X X
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
2.3.2
Preliminary Points
¥
Select System Programming
Refer to Section 2 Programming the System.
1 - 4
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
2.4
Writing System Data
After turning on power, the system data can be programmed using
a Multiline Terminal connected to port 01 or port 02 (the Multiline
Terminal must be idle). System programming can be performed
while other Multiline Terminals in the system are in use. Some data
is written into memory immediately after the programming process,
but other data is not written until the stations or trunks are idle.
When the data is not written until a station or trunk is idle, the
station LCD displays DATA ENTRY, even after programming is
complete, to indicate that system data entry is still in progress.
When the in-use stations become idle, the data is written and the
station LCD displays only the time.
The data programmed for the following Memory Blocks is not
written while the Multiline Terminals or PBR are in use:
¥
When Multiline Terminals are in use:
·
Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment)
·
Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection)
·
Memory Block 2-07 (System Speed Dial Display
Assignment)
·
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment)
¥
When the PBR is in use:
·
Memory Block 1-8-01 (SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA
to CPU PBR Selection)
·
Memory Block 1-8-02 (PBR Receive Level Assignment
for Automated Attendant/DISA)
Programming Manual
1 - 5

Issue 7
Electra Elite
2.5
Programming Methods
2.5.1
Initializing the System
Turn on the new Key Service Unit (KSU) power supply.
After approximately 30 seconds, the system operates
with the system default values.
2.5.2
Using the Multiline Terminal for Programming
System programming can be performed using a Display
Multiline Terminal that is connected to station port 01 or
02.
Figure 1-2 Electra Elite Multiline Terminal shows the
terminal in the off-line mode.
Exit
Key
Display (LCD)
Message
Waiting LED
Help
Key
Softkeys
Flexible
Line Keys
Feature
Key
Dial
Recall
Keys
Key
Conference
Hold
l
Transfer
Key
Key
Key
Answer
Redial
Key
Key
Speaker
Key
Figure 1-2 Electra Elite Multiline Terminal
1 - 6
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Exit
Key
Message
Display (LCD)
Waiting LED
Softkeys
Dial
Keys
Directory Key
Help
Key
Flexible
Line Keys
Message Key
Feature
Key
Hold
Key
Mic
Answer
Recall
Key
Speaker
Key
Key
Key
Conference
Volume Control
Transfer
Key
Key
Microphone
Redial
Key
Figure 1-3 Dterm Series i Multiline Terminal
Programming Manual
1 - 7

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming
provides a list and description of the keys used during
Multiline Terminal Programming.
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming
Key
Description
K~I
Used to enter data from the dial pad or to specify a Memory Block
location.
J
Used to move the cursor to the left. The cursor moves one character
space to the left each timeJis pressed.
L
Used to move the cursor to the right. The cursor moves one character
space to the right each timeLis pressed.
O
Used to select another mode. Press
to switch modes as follows:
O · Mode or submode selection: Returns to Program Mode.
·
Data No. Mode: Return to a mode or submode selection, or
Program Mode (if no submode exists).
Each time the conference key is pressed, Memory Block item changes
are as follows:
R · Tenant Mode: The tenant number increments by one.
·
CO/PBX Line Mode: The CO/PBX line number increments by one.
·
Telephone Mode: The telephone port number increments by one.
·
Trunk Group Mode: The Trunk group number increments by one.
Y Future use.
T Used to return to the previous page in system programming.
X Future use.
U Used to enter a pause in speed dial programming mode or to clear data
in system programming mode.
W Flexible Line keys are used to specify a mode or submode when
selecting a Memory Block or to select programming data for input.
S Used to proceed to the next page in system programming.
This key is used to enter a pause, hyphen, asterisk or pound. To enter
an asterisk or pound:
Q Q + J = ,
Q + L = #
The Message Waiting LED turns on and off afterJ or L is pressed.
1 - 8
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for Programming (Continued)
Key
Description
P Used to exit the programming mode (go back on-line).
N
N
Used to write (save) data. After entering data, press
; the data is
written into memory. The next Memory Block is displayed.

Dterm Series i Multiline Terminal keys perform the same comparable function
as those for Electra Elite and Dterm Series E Multiline Terminal keys.
2.5.3
Entering Programming Mode
The following digital Multiline Terminals can be used to
program the system. Station ports 01 and 02 are
automatically assigned as programming stations.
¥
DTP/DTH/DTR-8D-1 TEL
¥
DTU-8D-2 TEL
¥
DTP/DTH/DTR-16D-1 TEL
¥
DTU-16D-2 TEL
¥
DTP/DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL
¥
DTU-32D-2 TEL
¥
ETW-16DC-1/2 TEL
¥
ETW-16DD-1/2 TEL
¥
ETW-24DS-1/2 TEL
To enter programming mode, the station must be idle
(on-hook). Perform the following procedure to go off-line.
1.
PressT.
2.
PressU.
3.
Dial L, K, and J in sequence. The Multiline
Terminal LCD indicates program mode is now
active.
P R O G R A M
M O D E
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Manual
1 - 9

Issue 7
Electra Elite
While off-line, the programming terminal cannot be
signaled by any system station. Off-line mode does not
timeout.
2.5.4
Page Switching
In Memory Block 1-1-18 (System Speed Dial Restriction
by Tenant) tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to
Flexible Line keys on the first page. Tenant number
08~15 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys on the
second page. The tenant number corresponding to
Flexible Line key 1 of the current page is displayed on the
right side of the display.
During system programming, a value (data) is assigned to
each Flexible Line key. When the number of values
exceeds the number of Flexible Line keys, value
assignments are displayed on additional pages. The
associated data can be entered on that page. The page
number is displayed on the right side of the LCD.
Figure 1-4 Page Display for 8-Key, 16-Key and 24-Key
Multiline Terminals shows an example of CO/PBX line
keys on each page and their corresponding tenant
numbers. In all cases, each page is represented by eight
line keys.
To navigate between pages, pressSto access the
next page, or pressTto return to the previous page.
1 - 10
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

8-Key Multiline Terminal
8-Key Multiline Terminal

(Page 1)
(Page 2)
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
01
0 2
03
04
09
10
11
12
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
05
06
07
08
13
14
15
16
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
01 to indicate Page 1
09 to indicate Page 2
16-Key Multiline Terminal
24-Key Multiline Terminal
(Page 1)
(Page 1)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
01
02
03
04
01
02
03
04
05
06
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 7
LK 8
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
05
06
07
08
07
08
09
10
11
12
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LK 17
LK 18
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LK 19
LK 20
LK 21
LK 22
LK 23
LK 24
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
01 to indicate Page 1
01 to indicate Page 1
(Page 2)
(Page 2)

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
LK5
LK6
09
10
11
12
09
10
11
12
13
14
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
LK 7
LK 8
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
13
14
15
16
15
16
17
18
19
20
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LK 17
LK 18
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LK 19
LK 20
LK 21
LK 22
LK 23
LK 24
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
LCD Display:
LCD Display:
09 to indicate Page 2
09 to indicate Page 2
Figure 1-4 Page Display for 8-Key, 16-Key and 24-Key Multiline Terminals
Programming Manual
1 - 11

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Figure 1-5 Page Switching for Data Values is an example
of 10 data values. Values are displayed on two pages.
16-Key Multiline Terminal
(Page 1)
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Data 01
Data 02
Data 03
Data 04
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Data 05
Data 06
Data 07
Data 08
LCD Display:
01 to indicate Page 1
(Page 2)
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
Data 09
Data 10
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
LCD Display:
09 to indicate Page 2
Figure 1-5 Page Switching for Data Values
2.5.5
Station Port Numbering Plan
Some memory blocks require entering a 2-digit port
number. The Electra Elite 48/192 system supports 48/
120 ports, respectively. Programming values for entry of
Port Assignments are defined below:
Port Assignments
Programming Value
01~99
01~99
100~109
A0~A9
110~119
B0~B9
120
C0
Q
To enter an A, B, or C, press
and 1, 2, or 3.
1 - 12
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
SECTION 3

SYSTEM DATA LIST
Table 1-3 System Data is a complete list of memory blocks that are
available in the Electra Elite system. The information is organized by
mode, submode, and then numerically by memory block number. The
memory block number and name, the default values, and programming
values are provided for each memory block.
Table 1-3 System Data
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Pause Time Selection
3.0s
1.0s, 3.0s
01
DP Interdigit Time Selection
B
Pattern A or B
02
Hookflash Time Selection
600ms
20ms, 40ms, 60ms, 80ms, 100ms, 140ms,
160ms, 200ms, 400ms, 600ms, 800ms,
1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 5.0s
03
Hold Recall Time Selection
25s
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s, (No
(Non-Exclusive Hold)
Limit)
04
Automatic Redial Time Selection
Table 1: 030
Table 1: 001 ~ 050 sec.
Table 2: 060
Table 2: 001 ~ 100 sec.
Table 3: 002
Table 3: 001 ~ 015 times
05
Start Time Selection
10s
2s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s, 70s
06
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time
(No Limit)
10s, 20s, 30s,
Selection
07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
(No Limit)
10s, 20s, 30s,
09
Manual Pause Selection
NO
NO, YS
11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
YS
NO, YS
12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
45s
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s,
Selection
(No Limit)
13
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
C
OFF, ON, A ~ H
14
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
A
A ~ H
18
System Speed Dial Restriction by
CO/PBX Line LED On
LED On: Not Restricted
Tenant
LED Off: Restricted
20
DID Digit Length Selection
3
2, 3, or 4
21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
NO
NO, YS
22
DID Digit Conversion Table
T
T (Station or Closed Number)
TN (Tenant)
Programming Manual
1 - 13

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy
NON
NON, T (TEL), TN (Tenant)
Station or Undefined Digit
24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
9
Up to six digits (three numeric, three
pauses)
25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
8
Up to six digits (three numeric, three
pauses)
27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching
Not Specified
Day/Night Mode Time (24-hour clock)
Time Assignment
28
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO
TEL
TEL, CO
Selection
29
Private Line Assignment
Not Specified
CO/PBX Line Number, Tel Port Number
30
Route Advance Block Assignment
All Blocks 00 (Not Set)
Priority of Trunk Group Number
32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of
CO/PBX Line LED Off
Pattern 1, Pattern 2
Week Selection
Pattern 1
(Sunday ~ Saturday)
33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display
DIAL DIAL,
NAME
Selection
34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
PAT3
PAT1, PAT2, PAT3, PAT4, ICM, VOICE
35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
100
100, 1,000 Memories
37
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
10s
10s, 20s, 30s, 60s
46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
Refer to Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment on page 1-83.
47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Refer to Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment on page 1-88.
48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
All Dial 000 (Not Used)
N/A
49
Networking Trunk Group/Route
Not Specified
101~132 (Trunk Group 01 ~ 32) or
Advance Assignment
201~216 (Route Advance Block 01 ~ 16)
50
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add
Not Specified
10 digits max.
Assignment
51
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
A
A ~ H, NO
52
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection
B
A ~ H, NO
53
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
D
A ~ H, NO
54
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring
C

A ~ H, NO
Pattern
55
DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection
A
A ~ H, NO
1 - 14
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
57
CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection
1s
None, 1s~13s
59
Synchronous Ringing Selection
YS
YS, NO
60
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment
Refer to 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment on page 1-106.
61
8-Digit Matching Table to Class
Refer to 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment on page 1-108.
Assignment
62
System Speed Dial Override by Class
YS
NO = No Override
Selection
YS = Override
63
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1.0
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0,
5.0, 8.0, (No Limit)
64
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/
1.0
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0,
Camp-On Recall Time Selection
5.0, 8.0, 10.0
65
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny
Class 01 ~ 04 YS
YS (Allow)
Selection
Class 05 ~ 14 NO
NO (Deny)
66
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial
Tables 00 ~ 14 = Used
N/A
Assignment
(All CO/PBX Line LEDs
On)
Table 15 = Unused
(CO/PBX Line LED Off)
67
OCC Table Assignment
Tables 00 ~ 15 = Blank
N/A
Table 16 = 1010XXX
68
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table
CO/PBX Line LED Off
Refer to 8-Digit Matching Table to OCC
Assignment
Table Assignment on page 1-118.
69
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
YS
NO = No Restriction
YS = Restriction
70
Code Restriction Class Assignment
15
Class 00 ~ 15
when Lockout is Set
71
First Delay Announcement Start Time
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Selection
72
First Delay Announcement Repeat
1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Selection
73
First to Second Delay Announcement
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
Interval Time Selection
(No Limit)
74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat
1 1~
8
Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 15

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat
20
In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
Interval Time Selection
(No Limit)
76
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
YS
YS = Send Alert Tone
NO = Do not send Alert Tone
77
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (CO)
15s
00 ~ 99 sec.
78
Caller ID Display Assignment for
Not Specified
Up to 15 ports
System Mode
Tel Port No. = 01~ CO
79
BGM Port Assignment
00
00 (Not Specified), 01~ 64
80
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit
100/70
In milliseconds: 70/60, 100/70, 400/100,
Selection
600/100, 900/200
81
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
4s
2s, 4s, 8s, 16s, 32s
82
CO Feature Code Service for Code
Not Specified
10 tables each with up to 10 digits
Restriction

LK 1 System Mode
LK 2 ICM
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
90s
90s, 120s, (No Limit)
01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal
VOICE
TONE
Selection
VOICE
02
Automatic Callback Release Time
30m
30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 5m, 10m, 20m, 30m
Selection
03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number
3DGT
2DGT, 3DGT, 4DGT
Selection
04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
No CAR Blocks are
CAR Blocks:
Assigned
Port 01~CO - 4 ports per block
08
Specified Station Access Code
00 = 01
Tel. Port Number
Assignment
01 ~ 23 Not Set
1 - 16
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 2 ICM (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
09~18
Customized Message 1~10 Assignment
09 = DND
Maximum of 13 characters.
10 = MEETING
11 = BUSINESS TRIP
Refer to Section 9 Character Assignment
12 = NOT IN
on page 1-702 for a list of characters.
13 = WITH GUEST
14 = OUT OF OFFICE
15~18 = Not Specified
19
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
B
OFF, ON, A~H
20
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
A
A~H
21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
No CAR Blocks are
CAR Blocks:
Assigned
Port 01~C0 - 4 ports per block
22
Call Forward No Answer Time
8s
4s, 8s, 12s, 18s, 24s, 30s, 60s
Selection
23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
1.0
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 8.0,
10.0
24
Intercom Feature Access Code
Refer to Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment on page 1-149.
Assignment
25
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
YS
YS (Tone provided)
NO (No Tone)
26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment
10s 00~99
sec.
(ICM)
30
PS Out of Area Time Assignment
08s
00~99 sec.
32
IP Phone Block Assignment
No IP Phones assigned
LED Off: Not Assigned
LED On Green: IP Assigned
LED On Red: Block Not Available

LK 1 System Mode
LK 3 SLT
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Bounce Protect Time Selection
300ms
Page 1:
0ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms,
400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms
Page 2:
800ms, 900ms, 1000ms,
1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms,
1400ms, 1500ms
Programming Manual
1 - 17

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 3 SLT (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
HOLD
HOLD
FLASH
03
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
10s
10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s.
04
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection
YS
YS, NO
05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
290
In milliseconds: 40, 90, 140, 190, 240, 290,
340, 390, 440, 490, 540, 590, 640, 690,
740, 790
06
Hookflash End Time Selection
07 (HST + 700 ms.)
Refer to Hookflash End Time Selection on
page 1-162.
07
Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Blank
Up to 4 digits
08
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection
1s
0s, 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 8s
09
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection
1.5s
0.5s, 1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 3.5s
10
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit
110/80
In milliseconds: 60/70, 110/80, 410/100,
Time Selection
610/100, 810/190

LK 1 System Mode
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect
060
In minutes: 000~999
Time Selection
01
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR
20s
5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s
Release Time Selection
02
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed

In seconds: 10, 20, 30, (No Limit)
Ringing Time Selection
03
Automated Attendant No Answer
2m
1m, 2m, 3m, 4m
Disconnect Time Selection
04
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension
999
2-digit = 00~99
Assignment
3-digit = 000~999
4-digit = 0000~9999
05
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night
NO
YS, NO
Mode Selection
1 - 18
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.) (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
08
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout
NORMAL NORMAL,
RELEAS
Response Selection
09
Automated Attendant PBR Start Time
FR
FR = Same Time as Greeting
Selection
AF = After Greeting
11
Automated Attendant Message Day/
NO
YS, NO
Night Mode Selection
12
Automated Attendant Message to
00
Tenant Number 00 to 47
Tenant Assignment
13
Automated Attendant Answer Delay
04s
00~99s, per MSG 1~8
Time Assignment
14
Automated Attendant Message Access
Refer to Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit)
Code (1-Digit) Assignment
Assignment on page 1-179.
15
Automated Attendant Message Access
Refer to Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit)
Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Assignment on page 1-179.
16
Automated Attendant Message Repeat
1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Selection
All messages
17
Automated Attendant Delay
RBT
RBT, MOH
Announcement Hold Tone Selection
18
Automated Attendant Delay
NONE (Not specified)
None, MSG1, MSG2, MSG3, MSG4,
Announcement Assignment
MSG5, MSG6, MSG7, MSG8
19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay
4m
0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m, 5m,
Announcement Interval Time Selection
10m, 20m.
20 Automated
Attendant
Delay
30s
0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m, 5m,
Announcement Disconnect Time
10m, 20m
Selection
21
Automated Attendant Extension
Not Specified
2-digit (10~99), 3-digit (100~999), or 4-digit
Number Assignment
(1000~9999) extension numbers
Messages 1~8
22
Automated Attendant Direct Extension
Not Specified
2-digit (10~99), 3-digit (100~999), or 4-digit
Ring Assignment
(1000~9999) extension numbers
Messages 1~8
Programming Manual
1 - 19

Issue 7
Electra Elite

LK 1 System Mode
LK 5 SMDR/LCR
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
02
SMDR Print Format
ALL
ALL, MSK
13
Printer Connected Selection
NO
NO, PC(Future), YS
14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
YS
YS, NO
25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
040s
000~990s (in 10-second increments)
26
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print
OUT
ALL, OUT, INC
Selection

LK 1 System Mode
LK 6 DSS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Attendant Add-On Console to
Refer to Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment on
Telephone Port Assignment
page 1-199.
03
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
VOICE
TONE, VOICE
05
Attendant Add-On Console Key
Refer to Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection on page 1-201
Selection
07
Message Board Lamp Assignment
NON
NON (Not assigned)
MSG (message)
08
Attendant Transfer Selection During
YS
NO, YS
Live Record

LK 1 System Mode
LK 7 ESP
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Doorphone Assignment
No default
LK1~LK4 Assigns DPH1~DPH4 Yes or No
01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
10s
10s, 30s, 60s, 90s
02
External Speaker Connection Selection
All Speakers (A~C) On
ESP A, ESP B, ESP C
1 - 20
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 7 ESP (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
03
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
YS
YS, NO
04
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
DPH1~4 ON
OFF, ON, A~H
05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency
C

A~H
Selection
06
External Paging Timeout Selection
5.0
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 8.0,
(No Limit)
07
External Ring Relay Pattern Selection
PT3
Refer to External Ring Relay Pattern
Selection on page 1-216.
08
External Speaker Chime Selection
PRT
PRT (Normal paging tone before Page)
C-S (Chime Start Only)
C-B (Chime Start/End)
09
External Speaker Chime Start Time
700
In milliseconds: 000, 100, 200, 300, 400,
Selection
500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200,
1300, 1400, 1500

LK 1 System Mode
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to
LK1 and LK2 Off
Off = Single Line Telephone
CPU PBR Selection
On = Automated Attendant/DISA
02
PBR Receive Level Assignment for
03 (36.0 dBm)
Refer to PBR Receive Level Assignment
Automated Attendant/DISA
for Automated Attendant/DISA on page
1-222.
04
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
12
12, 24
07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature
Refer to Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 on page
Selection 1
1-224.
08
Class of Service (Station) Feature
Refer to Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 on page 1-228.
Selection 2
09
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
A
Medley A or B
10
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
7s
3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s
11
System Refresh Time Assignment
4H
NON, 4H, 8H, 12H, 24H
Programming Manual
1 - 21

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
12
VRS Message Recording Time
15s x16
Time and number of messages: 15s x 16,
Selection
30s x 8, 60s x 4, 120s x 2
13
VRS Message Function Assignment
Refer to VRS Message Function Assignment on page 1-238.
15
Tone Assignment
A
Refer to Tone Assignment on page 1-240.
16
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
PR1
Refer to Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
on page 1-243.
17
PC Programming Password
Class 1, 2 All Blank
N/A
Assignment
18
Site Name Assignment
Not Assigned
N/A
25
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
Not Specified
Agent Station Number and ACD/UCD
Group Number
26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt
000
Voice Mail Pilot Number
Number
27
Forced Account Code Length
10DGT
1~13 Digits
Assignment
29
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot
Not Assigned
Pilot Number for up to 4 Groups
Number Assignment
30
SCD Group Agent Assignment
Not Assigned
1~4 Digits
31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
INT
INT, EXT
32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
0dB
0dB, -6dB
33
Master Clock Selection
0: Not Assigned
Cabinet: 0~2
Slot: 1~4
35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting
COM 1 = 38.4
4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps
Assignment
COM 2 = 4.8
COM 3 = 4.8 (Not used)
COM 4 = 9.6
36
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting
NON/1
NON/1, NON/2, EVEN/1, ODD/1
Assignment
37
General Purpose Relay Assignment
NO
NO, YS
38
Modem Number for Remote
Not Assigned
Any Unused Extension Number
Programming Assignment
(1~4 digits)
40
ACD Hunt Time
10s
10s, 20s, 30s, 60s, 120s, 240s,
( No Limit).
43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
Not Specified
CO/PBX trunks 01~64
1 - 22
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route
No Alternate Route
No Alternate Route
Assignment
101~132 for trunk group 01~32
201~216 for route advance block 01~16
45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route
101
No Alternate Route
Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
101~132 for trunk group 01~32
201~216 for route advance block 01~16
46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
911
1, 11, 911
47
Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message
Not Specified
2-digit (10~99), 3-digit (100~999), or 4-digit
Notification Assignment
(1000~9999) CARs
48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time
YS
YS, NO
Selection

LK 1 System Mode
LK 9 DISA
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
DISA ID Code Assignment
Refer to DISA ID Code Assignment on page 1-273.
02
DISA Password Effect/Invalid Selection
YS
NO (Invalid), YS (Password effects)
LK 1 System Mode
LK 10 Call by Call
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Call by Call Type of Network ID
All RABs 2
0,1
Not Used)
Assignment
2
National Network Identification
3~7 Not
Used
01
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment
All RABs 01
00
Not Used)
01
Interexchange Carrier Code
02~15
Not Used
Programming Manual
1 - 23

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 10 Call by Call (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
02
Call by Call Type of Number
All RABs 0
0
Unknown
Assignment
1 International
2 National
3
Network Specific
4
Subscriber or Local
5~7 Not
Used
03
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID
All RABs 00
00
Unknown
Assignment
01 ISDN/Telephony
Numbering
Plan)
02 Not
Used
3
Future Data Numbering Plan
04~08
Not Used
09
Private Numbering Plan
10~15
Not Used
04
Call by Call Network ID Assignment
All RABs Unspecified
Three or four-digit Call by Call Network ID
05
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
All RABs 00
00
Non-CBC RAB, None
Assignment (Service)
01
5ESS SDN
02
5ESS MEGACOMBO800
03
5ESS MEGACOM
06
5ESS ACCUNE)
08
5ESS International 800
16
5ESS AT&T MultIQuest 900 Service
17
NI-2 INWATS
18
NI-2 OUTWATS
19
NI-2 FX
20
NI-2 Tie Trunk
01
DMS100 Private
02
DMS100 INWATS
03
DMS100 OUTWATS
04
DMS100 FX
05
DMS100 Tie Trunk
06
Call by Call Facility Coding Value
All RABs 00
00
Non-CBC RAB, None
Assignment (Feature)
05
5ESS Local Exchange
06
5ESS default-Common Carrier
07
Call by Call Service Parameter
All RABs 0 - 000
0 (0 or 1) - 000 (000~127)
Assignment
08
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment
All RABs 00
00 (Don't Send Delimiter)~24
09
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group
All RABs 00
00 (None)~16
Assignment
20
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment
99
01~16
For Electra Elite 48 (Default 16),
01~64
For Electra Elite192 (Default 64)
99
Default for all SFGs
1 - 24
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 10 Call by Call (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
21
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG
99
01~16
For Electra Elite 48 (Default 16),
Assignment
01~64
For Electra Elite 192(Default 64)
99 Default for all SFGs
22
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection
DID
CO, DID

LK 1 System Mode
LK 11 DTI
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
T1 Signal Format Selection
24
12 (Superframe), 24(Extended
Superframe)
01
Clear Channel Selection
ZCS
ZCS, B8ZS
02
Line Length Selection
1
Refer to Line Length Selection on page
1-305.
05
T1 Channel Selection
Refer to T1 Channel Selection on page 1-307.
06
Signaling Selection
LS
LS, GS
07
DTI Trunk Type Assignment
CO
CO, E&M, DID, ANI
08
Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment
2DGT
0 (No delete), 1~9

LK 1 System Mode
LK 12 ACD/UCD
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number
Not Specified
Any Unused Extension Number
Assignment
01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination
Not Specified
Any Unused Extension Number
Assignment
02
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection
60s
In seconds: , 10s, 20s, 30s, 60s,120s,
180s, 240s
Programming Manual
1 - 25

Issue 7
Electra Elite

LK 1 System Mode
LK 13 PRT
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
PRT Channel Assignment
24
0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24
01
PRT Signal Format Selection
24
12 (SF), 24 (ESF)
02
Clear Channel Selection
ZCS for S7000
ZCS, B8ZS
B8ZS for S8000
03
Call by Call Service Selection
NO
YS, NO
04
PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority
H L
H L, L H
Selection
05
PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group
00: Any Trunk Group
00, 1~32 Trunk Groups
assignment
LK 1 System Mode
LK 14 ARS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
ARS Allow/Deny Selection
NO
NO, YES
01
ARS Dialing Assignment
None
Tables 1~4.
02
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection
YES
YES, NO
03
ARS Route Table Number Assignment
00
Table 1~4, Dial No. 01~C8, Route 01~32
04
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number
NORMAL
NORMAL, TKGP 01~32, RAB 01~16ARS,
Assignment
or ICM
05
ARS Digit Delete Assignment
00
Route No. 01~32, No. of Digits 00~10
06
ARS Add Assignment
Not Specified
Route No. 01~32, Additional dialing digits
07
ARS Max Digit Assignment
24
01~99 Digits
1 - 26
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 1 System Mode
LK 15 K-CCIS
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection
NONE
NONE, MAIN, REMOTE
01
Common Signal Channel Data Speed
64k
64k, 56k, 48k(1), 48k(2)
Assignment
02
Common Signal Channel Assignment
00
Any DTI Trunk
03
Originating Point Code Assignment
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
04
Destination Point Code Assignment
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
05
Destination Point Code Transfer
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
Assignment
T001~T255 can be assigned.
06
Originating Office code Number
Blank
Valid Range: 0~99999
Assignment
07
K-CCIS Message Response Timeout
30 sec
Valid Times: 01~99 Seconds
Assignment
08
Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection
YS
NO, YS
09
K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop
5
1~7
Assignment
10
Calling Name Display Allow/Deny
NO
NO, YS
Selection
11
Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection
NO
NO, YS
12
Centralized Billing Point Code of
Blank
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
Center Office Assignment
13
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
NO
NO, YS
Remote Office Assignment
14
Centralized Day/Night Switching for
All Tables Not Specified
Tables 01~16
Main Office Assignment
Point Code Range: 00001~16367
LK 1 System Mode
LK 16 HUB
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection
YS (Enable)
YS, NO
Programming Manual
1 - 27

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 1 System Mode
LK 16 HUB (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Port Speed Selection 10/100
100 (100 Base-TX)
10 (10 Base-T), 100 (100 Base-TX)
Base-T
02
Port Duplex Mode Selection
HALF
HALF, FULL
03
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection
AUTO
MDIX, MDI, AUTO
04
VLAN Mode Selection
NO (Disable)
NO, YS (Enable)
05
Default VLAN ID Assignment
0001 (0x001 Hex.)
0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex.)
06
Port Based Priority Selection
NO (Not Assigned)
NO, LO (Low), HI (High)
07
High Priority RX Tag Assignment
7
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
08
High Priority TX Tag Assignment
7
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
09
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment
0
(Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)
10
Port Mirroring Selection
NO (Normal)
NO, YS (Mirror)
11
Mirroring Source Port Assignment
Port 1
Port range: 1~8
12
Mirroring Target Port Assignment
Port 1
Port range: 1~8
13
VLAN Group to VLAN ID
0001(0x001)
ID Range: 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff
Assignment
Hex.)
14
VLAN Group and Port Selection
NO
NO, YS
15
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection
NO
NO, YS
16
Flow Control for Full Duplex
NO
NO, YS
Selection
17
Back Pressure for Half Duplex
NO
NO, YS

LK 2 Tenant Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
Refer to Trunk to Tenant Assignment on page 1-415.
05
Line Key Selection
TEL
TEL (Telephone Mode)
TNAT (Tenant-Wide Mode)
1 - 28
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 2 Tenant Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
Refer to Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode on page 1-418.
07
System Speed Dial Display Assignment
CO/PBX Line LED On
On (Assigned)
All Speed Dial
Off (Not Assigned)
Confirmation Allowed
08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
All Tenants - No
N/A
Assignment
09
DID Limit to Tenant Assignment
00
00 (no limit), 01~64 Incoming Calls

LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Trunk Name/Number Assignment
Not Specified
Maximum of 13 digits (numbers, hyphens,
and spaces)
02
Trunk Status Selection
OUT&IN
OUT&IN, IN
03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
01
Refer to Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
on page 1-430
04
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No
NO
NO, YES
Selection
05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN, TANDM TRF, AA
06
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
Not Specified
CO 01~64
07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
M
M, L, H
11
CO External Source Selection
CO
CO, EXT SOURCE
12
Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment
00
01~64 CO/PBX
14
Tie Line Type Assignment
2ND DIAL
2ND DIAL, IMMEDIATE, DELAY, WINK
15
Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit
110 /80
Duration / Interdigit Time in milliseconds:
Selection
60/70, 60/80, 110/80, 160/80, 210/80,
410/100, 610/100, 810/190.
16
Tie Line Prepause Time Selection
0
In seconds:
0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0,
8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0,13.0
Programming Manual
1 - 29

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
17
Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection
520
In milliseconds:
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910, 1040,
1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690, 1820, 1950
18
Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection
520
In milliseconds:
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910, 1040,
1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690, 1820, 1950
19
Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal
03 Refer
to Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal
Detect Time Selection
Detect Time Selection on page 1-446.
20
Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection
2.0
In seconds:
0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0,
8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0
21
Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection
180
In milliseconds:
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270,
300, 330, 360, 390, 420, 450, 480
22
Tie Line Length of Delay Signal
300
In milliseconds:
Selection
0, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800, 2100,
2400, 2700, 3000, 3300, 3600, 3900, 4200,
4500
24
Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout
6s
1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s, 11s,
Selection
12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, (No Limit)
25
Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect
7s
1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s, 11s,
Timeout Selection
12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, (No Limit)
27
Tie Line Dial Tone Selection
YS
YS, NO
28
Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection
YS
YS (Send)
NO (Don't Send)
29
Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection
8
In dB:
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
30
Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection
8
In dB:
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
31
Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection
0
In dB:
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
32
Trunk External Receive Pad Selection
0
In dB:
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0
33
Disconnect Recognition Time Selection
0.3
In seconds:
0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9,
1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5
1 - 30
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
38
Automated Attendant Message to Trunk
1
Message 1~8 to CO 01~64
Selection
40
Automatic Release Signal Detection
350
In milliseconds:
Selection
0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400,
450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, (No Limit)
41
Delay Announcement Assignment
NN
Refer to Delay Announcement Assignment
on page 1-472.
42
DIT Assignment
No Assignment
N/A
43
ANA Assignment
No Assignment
N/A
44
Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/
Not Specified
N/A
PBX Line
45
Live Record Trunk Selection
NO
NO = No Live Recording
YS = Live Recording
50
ISDN Line SPID Assignment
Not Specified
Up to 20 digits
52
ISDN Trunk Directory Number
Not Specified
Up to 20 digits
Assignment
53
Caller Name Indication Selection
NUM
NO, NUM, NAM, TRK
59
Automated Attendant Function Selection
NORMAL
NORMAL, DELAY
61
DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time Selection
0s
0s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s
62
DIT Tenant Assignment
00
00~47
63
DIT Weekend Mode Selection
YS
YS, NO
64
DIT Night Mode Delay Answer Selection
NO
NO, YS
65
Hold Tone Automated Attendant
NONE
NONE, MSG 1~MSG 8
Selection
67
CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection
None
None, Pattern A~Pattern H
69
911 Cut Through Trunk Selection
NO
NO, YES
70
CIC Number Assignment
000 (Not Specified)
CIC Range: 001~127
90
Polarity Reverse Selection
NO
NO, YS
91
Trunk Type Selection
CO
CO, PBX, TIE, DID, CTX (Assume-9)
92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
MF
NIL, DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, MF
Programming Manual
1 - 31

Issue 7
Electra Elite

LK 4 Telephone Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
Refer to CO/PBX Ring
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring
Assignment (Day Mode)
on page 1-497.
02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
Refer to CO/PBX Ring
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring
Assignment (Night
Mode) on page 1-500.
03
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day
Station Port 01 and 02
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4
Mode)
Chime for All Four

Doorphones).
Station Port 01~120 Chime per Doorphone
04
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night
Station Port 01 and 02
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4
Mode)
Chime (All Line Key
Station Port 01~120 Chime per Doorphone
LEDs on)
07
Code Restriction Class Assignment
00 (All Stations)
Class 00~15 per Station
(Day Mode)
08
Code Restriction Class Assignment
00 (All Stations)
Class 00~15 per Station
(Night Mode)
09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
00 (All Tenant
Tenant Number
Telephones)
10
Station Number Assignment
100
Refer to Station Number Assignment on
page 1-511
11
Ringing Line Preference Selection
YS
NO, YS
12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
CO
Refer to Line Key Selection for Telephone
Mode on page 1-515
13
CO/PBX Busy Forward Station
Not Specified
N/A
Assignment
14
Intercom Master Hunt Number
NO
NO, YS
Selection
15
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward
No Telephones
Station Number
Assignment
Specified
17
Station to Class of Service Feature
00
Refer to Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment
Assignment on page 1-523.
18
Station Name Assignment
Not Specified
Up to six digits (characters)
19
Trunk Outgoing Restriction
LEDs Off
Off = Not Restricted
On = Restricted
23
Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment
Not Specified
Up to 10 digits
1 - 32
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LK 4 Telephone Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
24
SLT Hookflash Assignment
HOLD
HOLD, DISC
26
DISA ID Number Station Assignment
01
Refer to DISA ID Number Station
Assignment on page 1-532.
28
Multilingual LCD Indication Selection
ENG
JAPA, FREN, ENG, SPAN
29
HFU Selection
NO
NO, YS
30
Hold/Transfer Recall Display Selection
YS
YS, NO
31
Receiving Internal/All Call Page
YS
YS, NO
Selection
32
Trunk Digit Restriction
00 (No Limit)
00~99
35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
NO
NO, YS
36
Voice Prompt Selection
NO
NO, YS
37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
All LEDs Off
LED Off (No Ring)
(Day Mode)
Green LED (Immediate Ring)
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension Line
Key)
38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment
All LEDs Off
LED Off (No Ring)
(Night Mode)
Green LED (Immediate Ring)
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension LK)
39
APR Ring Mode Assignment
STA
NON, STA, ALL
40
LCR Class Selection
0
Class 0~4
41
SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference
YS
NO, YS
Selection
42
Call Forward Busy Immediately/Delay
YS
NO, YS
Selection
43
Station to Call Appearance Block
All Stations Assigned
Call Appearance Block 00~47
Assignment
Call Appearance Block
00
44
Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO
Not Specified
N/A
Selection
46
Live Record Auto Delete Selection
NO
YS, NO
47
ISDN Directory Number Selection
YES
YES, NO
49
Caller ID Display for CAR Key
00 (Not Specified)
Refer to the Memory Block Description.
Assignment
50
Multiline Terminal Type Selection
16
16, 24, or 24A
Programming Manual
1 - 33

Issue 7
Electra Elite
LK 4 Telephone Mode (Continued)
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
51
Off-Hook Ringing Selection
YS
YS, NO
52
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
YS
NO, YS
Ringing Assignment (Day Mode)
53
CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without
YS
NO, YS
Ringing Assignment (Night Mode)
54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Not Specified
7 or 10 digits plus up to 5-digit extension
Assignment
55
CO/PBX Telephone Ringing Pattern
None
None, Pattern A~Pattern H
Selection
56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
YS
YS, NO
57
CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority
CO
CO, TEL
Selection
58
Automated Attendant Selection for DID
NON
NON, AA1~AA8
59
APR/APA Hookflash Selection
NO
NO, YS
62
ISDN-PRI Directory Number selection
None
Calling Party Number (CPN)
64
Code Restriction Class (without
All Stations: Class 15
Classes 00~15
Authorization Code) Day Mode
Assignment
65
Code Restriction Class (without
All Stations: Class 15
Classes 00~15
Authorization Code) Night Mode
Assignment
66
MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection
MOH
MOH, RBT
67
IP Station Number Assignment
Blank
2- (00~99), 3- (000~999) or 4-digit
(0000~9999 station number
90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
NORMAL
NORMAL, DATA
91
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
M
M, L, H
92
Receiving Volume Selection
DOWN
DOWN, UP
93
Internal Zone Paging Selection
NO
No, A, B, C
94
3-Minute Alarm Selection
NO
NO, YS
95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
MF
DP, MF
1 - 34
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

LK 5 Trunk Group Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
00
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking
000
Delete up to two digits
Assignment
(No Add or Delete)
Add up to two digits
01
Tie Line Networking Tandem
All Trunk Groups
On = Enable
Connection Assignment
CO/PBX Line LEDs On
Off = Disable
02
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group
Enabled
On = Enable
Assignment
CO/PBX Line LEDs On
Off = Disable
03
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment
CO/PBX Line LEDs On
On = Enable
Use All Tables
Off = Disable
04
LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection
0
0~4
05
Common Signaling Channel Route
0 (Not Assigned)
CCH Range: 1~4
Selection
06
Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection
H L
H L, L H

LK 6 Copy Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
2
Tenant Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
3
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
4
Telephone Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
5
Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment
N/A
N/A
Programming Manual
1 - 35

Issue 7
Electra Elite

LK 7 ETU Mode
Data
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
No.
1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Refer to Card Interface Slot Assignment on page 1-623.
2
Telephone Type Assignment
TEL
NON, TEL, DSS CONSOL, SLT ADP,
DIGITAL VM, MSG BOARD
3-00
MIF (ACD) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-01
MIF (LCR) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-02
MIF (SMDR) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-03
MIF (UCD) Assignment
00 (No Assignment)
N/A
3-04
MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
00 (No Function)
N/A

LK 8 Special Mode
Data No.
Memory Block Name
Default Value
Programming Values
1
ROM Version Confirmation
N/A
N/A
2
System Speed Dial Memory Clear
N/A
N/A
3
Station Speed Dial Memory Clear
N/A
N/A
8
Second Initialization
N/A
N/A
Clock/Calendar Setting
N/A
N/A
1 - 36
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

SECTION 4

PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM DATA
This section provides detailed instructions for programming individual
memory blocks. The memory blocks are listed numerically. For each
memory block, the following information is provided.
¥
General Description is a brief explanation of the function of the
memory block.
¥
Display indicates the default information displayed in the Multiline
Terminal LCD during programming.
¥
Settings (when applicable) indicates the information that is entered
using the line keys on the Multiline Terminal.
¥
Programming Procedures contains detailed procedures to program
each memory block.
¥
Related Programming (when applicable) contains a list of
associated memory blocks that may need to be programmed.
¥
Notes contains additional information related to programming the
memory block.
Programming Manual
1 - 37

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 38
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Pause Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time of the pause that can be inserted between digits
Submode
dialed on CO/PBX and Tie lines.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Data

No.
Ti
tl
e
Setting
00
0 0 : P A U S E
3 . 0 s
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1.0s
3.0s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-09
Manual Pause Selection
1-1-24
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
1-1-25
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
3-91
Trunk Type Selection

Notes

1.
A pause is automatically inserted following a CO/PBX Access Code (e.g., 9) by programming CO/PBX lines as
PBX in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) and 1-1-24/25 (PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I/II).
2.
Manual pauses can be stored for use when dialing outside lines by the Last Number Redial or Save/Store and
Repeat features using Memory Block 1-1-09 (Manual Pause Selection).
3.
Pauses can be stored as part of System and Station Speed Dial buffers when needed.
Programming Manual
1 - 39

Issue 7
Electra Elite
DP Interdigit Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum pause time between Dial Pulses. Use this memory
Submode
block to Select either Pattern A or Pattern B.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Data

No.
Title
Setting
01
0 1 : D P
I N T E R
B
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KAto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

DP Dial
10 pps
20 pps
Data
Pattern A
650 ms.
500 ms.
Dial
Minimum
Dial
Pattern B
800 ms.
800 ms.
Pause
Signal
Signal
Time
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection

Notes

Use this memory block when DP Tie lines or DID are assigned in Memory Block 3-92 [Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF)
Selection] to send Dial Pulse signaling.
1 - 40
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Hookflash Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the CO or
Submode
PBX when the Recall key on a Multiline Terminal is pressed. A Single Line Telephone (SLT)
1
generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a Single Line Telephone hookflash is
assigned.
Data No.
Display
02
Data
Data
Page

PC Programming
No.
Title
Setting
No.
¦+BCM
0 2 : F L S H 6 0 0 m s
| 2
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
20ms
40ms
60ms
80ms
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
100ms
140ms
160ms
200ms
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
400ms
600ms
800ms
1.0s
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
1.5s
2.0s
3.0s
5.0s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KBto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to go to the next page.
T
Press
to go to the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 41

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-3-02
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
4-24
SLT Hookflash Assignment

Notes

1.
A 1- or 2-digit Access Code can be assigned in Memory Block 1-1-46/47 [Access Code (1- or 2-Digit)
Assignment] for Single Line Telephones to send a hookflash signal on a CO/PBX line (default: 6 #).
2.
A hookflash from a Single Line Telephone puts an existing call on hold or sends a hookflash signal on the
CO/PBX line.
1 - 42
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time a Non-Exclusive Hold outside call is held before a
Submode
recall tone is generated. When no Limit is selected, the hold recall alarm tone is not
1
generated.
Data No.
Display
03
Data
Data
No.
Title
Setting
PC Programming
0 3 : H O L D
R E C L
2 5 s
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
25s
45s
60s
90s
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default.

120s
180s
240s
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 +KCto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-63
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection

Notes

1.
Calls put on Exclusive Hold, recall using the data selected in Memory Block 1-1-63 [Hold Recall Time Selection
(Exclusive)].
2.
Calls placed on hold on Call Appearance keys, recall using this memory block.
3.
Calls parked in System Call Park locations recall using Memory Block 1-2-23 (System Call Park Recall Time
Selection).
Programming Manual
1 - 43

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automatic Redial Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
When a called party is busy, the station user dials an Access Code and restores the handset.
Submode
Use this memory block to define the redial timing parameters when automatic redial is set to
1
a busy CO/PBX number. After the specified number of call attempts with no answer, the
system stops dialing.
Data No.
Display
04
Data
Table
Data

PC Programming
No.
Title
1~3
Setting
¦+BM
0 4 : R E D I A L ( 1 )
0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KD to access the memory block.
3
Enter the Data Setting for Table 1.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Table
Description
Value
No.
J to move the cursor left
1
Calling Time
030
L to move the cursor right
2
Call Waiting Time
060
K~Ito enter numeric data
3
Call Attempts
002
Setting Data (Allowed):
Table 1 (Calling Time): 001~050 sec.
Table 2 (Call Waiting Time): 001~100 sec.
Table 3 (Call Attempts): 001~015 times

000 cannot be entered.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Table.
N
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. After pressing
for Table 3, the next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Definitions:
Calling Time: The time that the system automatically calls the busy CO/PBX number. After the programmed time
limit is reached, the call is abandoned.
Call Waiting Time: The time the system waits between call attempts.
Call Attempts: The number of times the system redials the busy CO/PBX number.
2.
When Call Pickup groups are assigned using Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment), the CO
lines must be assigned to the same Tenant group in Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment) for this
feature to work.
1 - 44
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time after dialing before the system starts the Elapsed
Submode
Call Time.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Data

Title
No.
Setting
05
0 5 : C A L L S T A R T
1 0 s
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
10s
20s
30s
40s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
50s
60s
70s
2s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment

Notes

This time is used for the features with functions described below:
Elapsed Call Time: The time after dialing before the Elapsed Call Time is started and displayed on a Multiline
Terminal.
SMDR Start Time: The time needed after dialing before the SMDR Valid Call Time is started. Refer to Memory Block
1-5-25 (SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment). For outgoing calls, both Elapsed Call Time and SMDR Valid Call Time
must elapse before a call record is generated.
Programming Manual
1 - 45

Issue 7
Electra Elite
CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time between when a CO/PBX call is detected and the
Submode
ringing tone changes to a higher pitch when the call is not answered. When No Limit is
1
selected, the ringing tone does not change.
Data No.
Display
Data
Setting
06
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming

0 6 : R I N G
A L M
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4

10s
20s
30s
The shaded selection is the
(No Limit)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-91
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection
1 - 46
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

1.
Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode/Night Mode)] must be set to ring.
2.
CO/PBX lines assigned for DIT/ANA do not activate this feature.
3.
Tie/DID lines assigned for Delayed Ringing follow this assignment after the delayed ringing starts.
4.
This feature uses the same ringing tone (Low, Medium, High) that is selected in Memory Blocks 3-07
(CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection) and 4-91 (Telephone Ringing Variation Selection). When High is selected
in those memory blocks, this feature does not function.
5.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
Programming Manual
1 - 47

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time before a Tie line call ringing at a station can begin
Submode
ringing at other preassigned stations when it is not answered in a programmed time. CO/
1
PBX Ringing Assignment defines the preassigned station.
Data No.
Display
Data
Setting
07
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 7 : T L
D L Y R N G

¦+ALM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4

10s
20s
30s
The shaded selection is the
(No Limit)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode
1 - 48
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

Example:
(D) ¤
System 1
System 2

Electra Elite
Electra Elite
¤(A) 100
¤(C) 102
System I
System II
¤(B) 101
¤(B) 101
(C) 102
(A) 100
¤
¤
¤
Time Elapsed
In this example, systems 1 and 2 are connected. Stations A (extension 100)
and C (extension 102) are assigned to ring on the Tie line using Memory
Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day/Night) Mode].
1.
To speak to station user A, station user D dials extension 100.
2.
In the example at station A:
¥
The ICM LED blinks, and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.
¥
The call can be answered by lifting the handset.
¥
Stations B and C users cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.
3.
In the example, when station user A does not answer in the specified time:
¥
The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.
¥
Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.
4.
After the timeout, the system uses the Day and Night Ringing Assignment and rings the assigned station.
5.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
Programming Manual
1 - 49

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Manual Pause Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify either Pause Insertion or Last Number Dialed/Speed Dial to
Submode
be executed using the Redial key when it is pressed after one or more digits of a dialed
1
number are entered.
Data No.
Display
Setting
09
Data
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 9 : M A N
P A U S E
N O
¦+BTS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + KI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-00
Pause Time Selection
1 - 50
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

1.
When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 +Q+ 12345 with this memory block set to NO, the
system interprets the sequence as:
9074000XXX345 (XXX = Qand 12 is interpreted as Speed Dial buffer 12).
2.
When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 +Q+ 12345 with this memory block set to YS, the
system interprets the sequence as:
9074000XXX12345 (XXX = is interpreted as a pause).
3.
The pause is inserted when Last Number Redial, Save and Repeat, or Store and Repeat is used to redial the
number.
4.
When this feature is allowed, Multiline Terminal users cannot use consecutive Speed Dial usingQ.
Programming Manual
1 - 51

Issue 7
Electra Elite
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block system-wide to select whether or not the station user can press the
Submode
Transfer key to perform a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Title
Setting
No.
Data
11
1 1 : R I N G
T R F
Y S
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-12
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection

Notes

Transfers or camp-ons from Attendant Add-On Consoles are also affected using this memory block.
1 - 52
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On from a
Submode
station (without an Attendant Add-On Console) recalls back to the originating station when
1
the call is not answered.
Data No.
Display
Data
Setting
12
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
1 2 : T R F
R E C L
4 5 s
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
25s
45s
60s
90s
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default.

120s
180s
240s
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-1-64
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection

Notes

When a station with an Attendant Add-On Console assigned to it transfers or camps-on a call and the call goes
unanswered, the call recalls using Memory Block 1-1-64 (Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection).
Programming Manual
1 - 53

Issue 7
Electra Elite
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select a Ring Pattern for CO transfers.
Submode
1
Display
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data Page
13
1 3 : C O T
P T N
C | 1
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
(Page 1)
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
OFF
ON
A
B
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
C
D
E
F
The shaded selection is the
(Page 2)
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
G
H
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to access the next page.
T
Press
to access the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-14
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
1 - 54
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Line
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Pattern
Key
Tone
LK 1
Off
Tone
LK 2
On
A

LK 3
B

LK 4
C
LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
Programming Manual
1 - 55

Issue 7
Electra Elite
CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select a ring tone for CO transfers.
Submode
1
Display
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data
14
1 4 : C O T R F
T O N E
A
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The available tones are:
Tone
Frequency
Tone A
480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone B
480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)
Tone C
1024/1285
Tone D
1024
Tone E
500
Tone F
1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone G
600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone H
1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-13
CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection
1 - 56
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not System Speed Dial is restricted for each
Submode
tenant.
1
Display
Data No.
Starting
Tenant
18
Speed Dial
No.
Data
Buffer No.
Groups
No.
Title
(0X~XX)
of 8
PC Programming
¦+AC
1 8 : S P E E D ( 0 X )
| 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Tenants 00~07
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
00
01
02
03
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
04
05
06
07
Page 2 Tenants 08~15
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
08
09
10
11
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
12
13
14
15
Page 3 Tenants 16~23
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
16
17
18
19
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Six pages provide access to
20
21
22
23
the Tenant Numbers. Tenant
Page 4 Tenants 24~31
Numbers 00~47 correspond to
the line keys listed in the table
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
to the left. None are restricted.
24
25
26
27
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
28
29
30
31
Page 5 Tenants 32~39
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
32
33
34
35
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
36
37
38
39
Page 6 Tenants 40~47
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
40
41
42
43
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
44
45
46
47
Programming Manual
1 - 57

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + AH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the tenant number.
Default Values
Speed Dial buffers have the nine groups listed in the table below.
All System Speed Dial buffers can
be dialed from any tenant.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial Number
Buffer No.
80 Codes
1000 Codes
0X
00~09
000~099
1X
10~19
100~199

X = 0~9
6X
60~69
600~699
7X
70~79
700~799
8X
N/A
800~899

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
S to move to the next page
T to move to the previous page
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On and Off.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area is
the default setting.
Data
Restricted
Not restricted
N
4
Enter all pages for the selected buffer, and press
to write the data and display the next Speed Dial Buffer No.
N
5
After entering data for the last Speed Dial Buffer No., press
to write that data, and the next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
2-01
Trunk to Tenant Assignment
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
1 - 58
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

1.
One or more tenants can be enabled to use each group.
2.
Use this memory block to assign which tenants use each group.
3.
When speed dial is set to 1000, 900~999 cannot be restricted.
4.
The X in each Speed Dial Buffer No. is displayed even when it is not entered.
5.
Tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first page. Tenant numbers 08~15 are assigned
to the Flexible Line keys on the second page. The tenant number corresponding to Flexible Line key 1 of the
current page is displayed under Starting Tenant No. In all cases, each page is represented by eight line keys.
Programming Manual
1 - 59

Issue 7
Electra Elite
DID Digit Length Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to define the number of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits in Memory
Submode
Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table).
1
Display
Data No.
20
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
2 0 : D I D
D G T
3
¦+ALN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BK to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter data:
Default Values
J to move the cursor left
3 (Setting Data 2, 3, or 4)
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
U to clear all data
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or Press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment
1 - 60
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to enable the DID Digit Conversion Table, Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID
Submode
Digit Conversion Table), for each number.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
21
2 1 : D I D
C N V
N O
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+ALN
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
NO
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment

Notes

1.
When NO is assigned, only Memory Block 5-00 has an impact on incoming DID numbers.
2.
When YS is assigned, each incoming DID number can be modified.
Programming Manual
1 - 61

Issue 7
Electra Elite
DID Digit Conversion Table
System Mode
1
General Description
Up to 200 incoming DID numbers can be assigned individually to ring at a preassigned
Submode
2-digit, 3-digit, or 4-digit station number, closed number (plus outgoing digits), or tenant
1
number (00~47) for day mode or night mode. This memory block applies to the DID number
after it is modified by Memory Block 5-00 (Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking Assignment).
Data No.
Display
22
Data
Digits
Setting

Mode
No.
Received
Data
PC Programming
¦+ALN
2 2 :
D Y = T
DNIS Data
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
T
(Station or
TN
Closed
(Tenant)
Default not assigned
Number)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BB to access the memory block.
3
Press Line Key to select Station or closed number or tenant.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data or name (Refer to Section 9 Character
Assignment)
Q to switch between Day and Night
U to clear all data
S to assign the name (Refer to Dial Pad Entry chart)
Digits Received: 0000~9999
Setting Data:
Station No. is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~99, 100~999, 0r 1000~9999).
Closed Number is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number to facilitate routing to the closed
number.
Tenant No. 00~47
DNIS Data: 8-character maximum
1 - 62
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Program N
ming Procedures (Continued)
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Effective Digit Selection
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-23
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit
5-00
Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment

Notes

1.
When Memory Block 5-00 is used to add or delete digits on a trunk group, this memory block is used to route the
digits after the add or delete.
2.
When converting a DID number to a tenant, the following must be assigned to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment)
Programming Manual
1 - 63

Issue 7
Electra Elite
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or
System Mode
Undefined Digit
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block when Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table) is enabled
1
to define where digits are routed when undefined or the station is busy.
Data No.
Display
23
Data
Setting
Setting
No.
Title
Data 1
Data 2
PC Programming
2 3 : T R F
E X = N O N
¦+ALN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
T
TN
NON
The shaded selection is the
(TEL)
(Tenant)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BC to access the memory block.
3
Enter Setting Data 1 using the Line key.
Default Values
Enter Setting Data 2 using the dial pad.
NON

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
TEL is 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~99, 100~999, or 1000~9999)
Tenant number can be 00~47
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
1 - 64
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

When this memory block is set to a tenant, the following must be signed to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-09 (Telephone to Tenant Assignment)
Programming Manual
1 - 65

Issue 7
Electra Elite
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together with pauses for
Submode
outgoing calls.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

24
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
2 4 : P B X
A C
9
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BD to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter data:
Default Values
J to move the cursor left
9
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
Q to insert a pause
U to clear all data
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
1 - 66
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

Example:
¤

Electra Elite
PBX
System
Electra Elite
PBX Line
CO Line
System
Intercom Line
1.
Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This
limitation applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).
2.
A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.
3.
Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.
4.
A pause cannot be inserted as the first digit or as consecutive digits.
5.
The entry for pause is .
Programming Manual
1 - 67

Issue 7
Electra Elite
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a second PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together with
Submode
pauses for outgoing calls.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

25
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
2 5 : P B X
A C
8
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BE to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter the option:
Default Values
J to move the cursor left
8
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
Q to insert a pause (cannot be first digit)
U to clear all data
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-91
Trunk Type Selection
1 - 68
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

Example:

Electra Elite
PBX
¤
System
Electra Elite
System
PBX Line
Tie Line
Intercom Line
1.
Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This
limitation only applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).
2.
A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.
3.
Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.
4.
A pause cannot be inserted as the first or as consecutive digits.
Programming Manual
1 - 69

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to assign a start time for Pattern 1 and a different start time for Pattern
2 to automatically switch between Day Mode and Night Mode.
Data No.
Display
27
Day Mode
Night Mode
PC Programming
Start Time
Start Time
Data Pattern
Setting
Setting
No. (1/2)
Data
Data
¦+BM
2 7 : 1
:
,
:
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BG to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter data:
Default Values
J to move the cursor left
Not Specified
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
U to clear all data when the cursor is in the Data No. position
N
4
Press
to write the data. The switching time for pattern 2 is displayed.
5
Use the dial pad to change the time.
N
6
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-32
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection
1-4-05
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection I
1-8-48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
1 - 70
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Related Programming (Continued)
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

Notes

1.
The start time for Day Mode or Night Mode can be programmed to automatically switch modes at the specified
times.
2.
A start time for Day Mode only or Night Mode only cannot be programmed.
3.
Day Mode and Night Mode cannot be programmed for the same start time.
4.
The time is entered using 24-hour clock only.
5.
The first time input indicates when Day Mode starts. The second time input indicates when Night Mode starts.
6.
Refer to Memory Block 1-1-32 (Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection) for selecting either Pattern
1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start time for each day of the week. Assigning each day of the week to either
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 allows Day/Night Mode start time for Monday through Friday to differ from Day/Night Mode
start time for Saturday and Sunday.
Programming Manual
1 - 71

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Distinctive Ringing by Telephone or CO Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a distinctive ringing tone for each telephone or each
Submode
CO/PBX line.
1
Display
Data No.
28
2 8 : D S T
R I N G
T E L
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
TEL
CO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-07
CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
4-91
Telephone Ringing Variation Selection

Notes

1.
TEL = Telephone Mode
Ringing tone is specified in Memory Block 4-91 (Telephone Ringing Variation Selection).
2.
CO = CO/PBX Line Mode
Ringing tone is specified for each CO/PBX line in Memory Block 3-07 (CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection).
1 - 72
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Private Line Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign an outside line as a private line. The private line cannot be
Submode
seized by any other telephone, and an LED indication is not provided to other terminals.
1
Display
Data No.
Combination
29
Data
No.
CO No.
Tel. Port No.
No.
Title (1/2)
(01~64)
(01~CO)
PC Programming
2 9 : P
1
C =
T =
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + BI to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter data:
Default Values
J to move the cursor left
Not Specified
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
U to clear all data when the cursor is in the Data No. position
N
4
Press
to write the data. Data for the second line is displayed. Move the cursor to change the data.
N
5
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
2-06
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode
4-12
Line Key Selection for Telephone Mode

Notes

1.
Two private lines can be assigned to one station or one private line can be assigned to two stations.
2.
A Single Line Telephone (SLT) user cannot dial the Trunk Group Access Code to access a private line. The
Single Line Telephone user can dial the specified Line Seizure Access Code assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46/
1-1-47 [Access Code (1-digit/2-digit) Assignment], Function 063 or 064 to access the line.
3.
When a station is allowed Barge-In originate, and a second station is allowed Barge-In receive, Barge-In is not
allowed on a private line unless both stations share the private line.
Programming Manual
1 - 73

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Route Advance Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a priority level (1~4) to each Trunk group assigned in a
Submode
Route Advance Block. The system has 32 blocks that can be specified.
1
System Software S6000 or lower supports 16 Route Advance Blocks.
Data No.
System Software S7000 or higher supports 32 Route Advance Blocks.
30
Display
PC Programming
Priority
¦+BCS
Block
No.
Setting
Data
No.
(1~4)
Data
No.
Title
(1~32)
3 0 : R T
A D V 0 1 1 = 0 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CK to access the memory block.
3
Enter data using one of the following.
N
Default Values
Press
repeatedly to cycle until desired Block and Priority number are displayed.
N
All Blocks (00)
Use dial pad to enter Trunk Group Number, and press
.
 OR 
Use dial pad to select Block Number, Priority Number, and Trunk Group in sequence,
N
and press
after Block 32 to display the next memory block.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
Block No.
Priority No.
Setting Data
1
Trunk Groups 01~32
2
Trunk Groups 01~32
1
3
Trunk Groups 01~32
4
Trunk Groups 01~32

1
Trunk Groups 01~32
2
Trunk Groups 01~32
32
3
Trunk Groups 01~32
4
Trunk Groups 01~32
P
4
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 74
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment

Notes

1.
When 00 (Not Set) is programmed, no trunks are accessed for this priority setting.
2.
When Route Advance Block Numbers are assigned and a line key is pressed or an Access Code is dialed, the
system starts searching for an idle line in a specified group (beginning with the Trunk group assigned priority 1).
3.
When all CO/PBX lines are in use, the line with the next highest priority is seized.
4.
Route Advance Block Number Access Codes are defined in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit)
Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] function number 201~232.
5.
Press the Transfer key repeatedly to cycle through four priorities for each Block sequentially until all Blocks are
covered, and then advance to the next memory block. The Trunk Group must be added using the dial pad keys.
Programming Manual
1 - 75

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select either Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start time for
Submode
each day of the week. Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time
1
Assignment) sets Day/Night Mode start time for Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 to switch the system
between Day Mode and Night Mode.
Data No.
Display
32

PC Programming
Data

Title
¦+BM
No.
3 2 : D / N
B Y
D A Y
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Thu
Fri
Sat
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
Each time a CO/PBX line is pressed, the LED indication changes from Pattern 1 to
Sunday ~ Saturday = Pattern 1
Pattern 2.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area
is the default
Day/Night
Day/Night
setting.
Automatic
Automatic
Data
Switching
Switching
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 76
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
1-8-48
Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection
4-09
Telephone to Tenant Assignment
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

By designating two time settings in Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment),
one of the two settings can be assigned to each day of the week.
To specify Day/Night Mode automatic switching time for Monday ~ Friday, and Day/Night Mode automatic switching
time 2 for Saturday and Sunday, press CO/PBX line keys 1 and 7.
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Pattern 2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Programming Manual
1 - 77

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether the dialed number or name is displayed first on the
Submode
LCD of the originating station when an outgoing call is made using Speed Dial.
1
Display
Data No.
33

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
Title
PC Programming
¦+BE
3 3 : S P D
D I A L
D I S P
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
The shaded selection is the
DIAL
NAME
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-35
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation

Notes

When the name of the dialed party is not programmed in Memory Block 3-00, only the dialed number is displayed
regardless of programming in this memory block.
1 - 78
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to set a specific ringing pattern for incoming calls on Tie lines. After a
Submode
delay interval specified in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection), a
1
Tie call can ring at all Day/Night ring-assigned telephones using a different cadence.
Data No.
Display
Data
Setting
34
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
3 4 : T L I
R N G
P A T 3
¦+ALN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
PAT1
PAT2
PAT3
PAT4
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
ICM
VOICE
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CDto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-53
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)

Notes

1.
Specify one pattern in the Ringing Pattern Selection Table.
2.
When Voice is selected, switching from voice to tone is not allowed, Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay
Ringing Time Selection) is not used, and Handsfree Answerback is not allowed at the receiving station.
Programming Manual
1 - 79

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Ringing Pattern Selection
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
1
2
3
4
5
Same as Internal Ring
6
Voice Announce
1 - 80
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Speed Dial Buffer Allocation
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify either 100-memory or 1000-memory allocation.
Submode
1
Display
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data
35
3 5 : S P D
A L L O
1 0 0
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BE
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
100
1000
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CEto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection

Notes

1.
The 100-memory option allows 80 System Speed Dial memories and 20 Station Speed Dial memories.
2.
The 1000-memory option does not allow Station Speed Dial memories.
Programming Manual
1 - 81

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time that a station with Trunk Queue set rings, before
Submode
the queue is automatically canceled.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
37
3 7 : T R U N K
Q U E
1 0 s
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
10s
20s
30s
60s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + CGto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

When all trunks in a particular Trunk group are busy, the station user can dial an Access Code to queue on the busy
Trunk group. When a Trunk in that group becomes idle, the queued station is signaled.
1 - 82
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a 1-digit number as an Access Code or station number.
Submode
1
Display
Dial
Data No.
No.
Data
Function
0~9
No.
Title
No.
* #
46
PC Programming
4 6 : 1 D G
( 0 ) = 1 7 6
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DF to access the memory block.
3
Enter the option.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Dial No.
Function No.
Function Name
J to move the cursor left
K
176
Specified Intercom Call
L to move the cursor right
A~C
001
Station Number
K~I to enter numeric data
D~G
000
Not Used
H
102
Trunk Group 2
I
101
Trunk Group 1
J
096
Last Number Redial
L
026
Callback Message Answer
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table on the following pages for a complete list.
N
5
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
N
6
Program each Dial No., and press
after the last Dial No. to display the next memory block.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 83

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a number (from 0~9), ,, or # to each selected function.
·
When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,, and 5# cannot be used).
2.
To enter # or , as part of an Access Code, pressQ then L or J.
3.
This memory block is used when a 2- or 3-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
4, 5, 6, 7
000
Not Used
034
Call Forward All Call Cancel from
Destination
1, 2, 3
001
Station Number
035
Station Outgoing Lockout Set
002
Not Used

036
Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel
037
Change Password
019
Not Used
038
Reset Password from Attendant
020
Call Forward No Answer Set
039
Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)
021
Call Forward No Answer Cancel
040
Log - ON/OFF
022
Call Forward Busy Set
041
Account Code Entry
023
Call Forward Busy Cancel
67
042
Call Pickup Direct
43
024
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
043
Not Used
44
025
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
044
Timed Alarm Set at SLTs
Cancel
045
Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs
#
026
Callback Message Answer
046
Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for
6#
027
SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash
Single Line Telephone from
Series 5000 or higher for DVM
Attendant
028
Not Used
4,
047
Call Park System Transfer
029
Not Used
4#
048
Call Park System Answer
41
030
Call Forward All Call Set
60
049
Volume/LCD Control
40
031
DND Set
050
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
42
032
Call Forward All Call/DND Cancel
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)
033
Call Forward All Call Set from
051
Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/
Destination
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)
1 - 84
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
052
Call Pickup CO/PBX by Tenant
55
075
All External Zone Paging
(1-digit)
56
076
External Zone A Paging
053
Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by
Tenant (2-digit)
57
077
External Zone B Paging
054
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
58
078
External Zone C Paging
(1-digit)
5#
079
External Meet-Me
055
Specified Tenant Internal Paging
080
Outgoing (CO only) Access in Same
(2-digit)
Tenant
056
Internal Emergency All Call Paging
59
081
All Internal/External Zone Paging
68
057
Intra-Tenant Call Pickup
082
System I. D. Number for Tie Line
69
058
Night Chime Call Pickup
Networking
059
Not Used
083 Not
Used
060
Call Pickup CO/PBX for other

Tenants
061
Internal/CO/PBX Transfer Call
085
Not Used
Pickup in Same Tenant
086
Tie Line Seizure in Same Tenant
062
SLT Park to Non-Exclusive Hold
087
PBX Line Seizure in Same Tenant
063
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
78
088
Trunk Queuing Set
Seizure (1-digit)
79
089
Trunk Queuing Cancel
064
Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line
Seizure (2-digit)
76
090
Station Speed Dial Programming
(Single Line Telephone)
065
Not Used
091
Doorphone 1 Call
6,
066
Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant
067
Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same Tenant
092
Doorphone 2 Call
068
Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same
093
Doorphone 3 Call
Tenant
094
Doorphone 4 Call
069
Call Pickup (CO only) in Same
77
095
Station/System Speed Dial Call
Tenant
(Single Line Telephone)
51
070
All Internal Zone Paging
,
096
Last Number Redial
52
071
Internal Zone A Paging
097
Not Used
53
072
Internal Zone B Paging
098
DSS 1 CALL
54
073
Internal Zone C Paging
099
DSS 2 CALL
5,
074
Internal/External Meet-Me
100
Not Used
Programming Manual
1 - 85

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
9
101
Trunk Group 01
155
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer Split
Cancel Series 5000 or higher
8
102
Trunk Group 02
156
Call Forward All Split Set
70
103
Trunk Group 03
Series 5000 or higher
71
104
Trunk Group 04
157
Call Forward All Split Cancel
72
105
Trunk Group 05
Series 5000 or higher
73
106
Trunk Group 06
158
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Split
Set for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
74
107
Trunk Group 07
Series 5000 or higher
75
108
Trunk Group 08
159
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Split
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
109~132 Trunk Group 09~32
Series 5000 or higher
133~139 Not Used
160~175 Not Used
45
140
Call Forward Busy/No Answer Set
0
176
Specified Station Access Code 00
for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
177
Specified Station Access Code 01
46
141
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)
178
Specified Station Access Code 02
47
142
Call Forward All Call Set for Call
179
Specified Station Access Code 03
Arrival Key (CAR)
180
Specified Station Access Code 04
48
143
Call Forward All Call Cancel for
Call Arrival Key (CAR)
181
Specified Station Access Code 05
144
Call Forward All Split Set for Call
182
Specified Station Access Code 06
Arrival Key (CAR)
183
Specified Station Access Code 07
145
Call Forward All Split Cancel for
Call Arrival Key (CAR)
184
Specified Station Access Code 08
146
Forced Account Code/Authorization
185
Specified Station Access Code 09
code (S8000 or higher required for
186
Specified Station Access Code 10
Authorization Code).
187
Specified Station Access Code 11
147
Forced Account Code/Authorization
code Access (S8000 or higher
188
Specified Station Access Code 12
required for Authorization Code).
189
Specified Station Access Code 13
148
Station Relocation
190
Specified Station Access Code 14
150
Call Forward No Answer Split Set
Series 5000 or higher
191
Specified Station Access Code 15
151
Call Forward No Answer Split
192
Specified Station Access Code 16
Cancel Series 5000 or higher
193
Specified Station Access Code 17
152
Call Forward Busy Split Set
Series 5000 or higher
194
Specified Station Access Code 18
153
Call Forward Busy Split Cancel
195
Specified Station Access Code 19
Series 5000 or higher
196
Specified Station Access Code 20
154
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer Split
Set Series 5000 or higher
197
Specified Station Access Code 21
1 - 86
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default Dial Numbers and Function Numbers
Default
Function
Default
Function
Function Name
Function Name
Dial No.
No.
Dial No.
No.
198
Specified Station Access Code 22
401
Closed Number Block 1
199
Specified Station Access Code 23

200
Not Used
416
Closed Number Block 16
201~216 Route Advance Block 01~16
501
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/
Series 5000 or higher
Erase (Voice Prompt, Automated
217~232 Route Advance Blocks 17~32
Attendant)
Series 7000 or higher
502
Voice Mail Message Set
233~250 Not Used
503
Voice Mail Message Cancel
251
DISA Password Set (Any station)
601
ARS Table 1 (S7000 or higher)
252
DISA Password Reset (Attendant
602
ARS Table 2 (S7000 or higher)
only)
603
ARS Table 3 (S7000 or higher)
253
DISA Password Confirmation
604
ARS Table 4 (S8000 or higher)
(Attendant only)
254
Not Used
255
Not Used
301
Third Digit Table Number 01 (2-digit
Numbering Plan can only be
entered.)

304
Third Digit Table Number 04 (2-digit
Numbering Plan can only be
entered.)
Programming Manual
1 - 87

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a 2-digit number as an Access Code.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Dial
No.
Data
0~9
Function
47
No.
Title
* #
No.
PC Programming
4 7 : 2 D G
( 0 0 ) = 0 0 0
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DG to access the memory block.
3
Enter the option.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
4
Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].
N
5
Press
to display next dial number in succession.
N
6
After programming last Dial No., press
to display the next memory block.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment

Notes

1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a number (from 00~99), ,, or # to each selected function.
·
When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,, and 5# cannot be used).
2.
To enter # or , as part of an Access Code, pressQ then L or J.
3.
Use this memory block when a 4-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.
1 - 88
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a 3-digit number as an Access Code.
Submode
1
Display
Third
Data No.
Digit Dial
Table
No.
Function
Data
Title
No.
0~9
No.
No.
48
(01~04)
PC Programming
4 8 : 3 D G / 0 1 ( 0 ) = 0 0 0
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DH to access the memory block.
3
Enter the Function No. for Dial No. 0 for Third Digit Table No. 01.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
All Dial 000 (Not Used)
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
QandJto enter ,
QandLto enter #
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
N
5
After last Dial No. entry, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 02, Dial No. 0.
N
6
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0 and Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
N
7
After last Dial No. entry for Table 02, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 03, Dial No. 0.
N
8
Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0 and Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
N
9
After last Dial No. entry for Table 03, press
to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 04.
N
10 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0 and Press
to write the data and display the next Dial No.
N
11 After last Dial No. entry for Table 04, press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
12 Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 89

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

1.
Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and
assign a 3-digit Access Code.
·
When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code or 2-digit Access Code, 3-digit Access Codes (with the
same first digit) become invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5,,
and 5# cannot be used).
2.
A station number is not assigned in this memory block.
3.
All items except function number 001 (Station Number) in 1-digit assignment are valid in this block.
4.
Four groups of Access Code Tables can be used. 0~9, ,, and # are the third digit Access Codes that are
assigned in the third digit tables.
5.
Before using this function, assign function numbers 301~304 (Table No. for third digit) in Memory Block 1-1-47
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].
6.
To program Access Code 811 for Trunk Group 02:
·
Use Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] to assign function 301 to 81.
·
Set Third Digit Table No. 01 dial number 1 to function 102.
Numbering Plan (2-Digit)
Dial No.
Function Number
81
301 (3rd Dgt Table 01)
82
302 (3rd Dgt Table 02)
83
303 (3rd Dgt Table 03)
84
304 (3rd Dgt Table 04)
Numbering Plan (3-Digit)
3rd Digit Table No. 01
Dial No.
Function Number
0
101 (Trunk Group 01)
1
102 (Trunk Group 02)
2
103 (Trunk Group 03)
3
104 (Trunk Group 04)
4
105 (Trunk Group 05)

9
110 (Trunk Group 10)
1 - 90
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to assign the function number of the Trunk Group to be used to
network an Electra Elite 48/192 system to another system by Tie lines or CO/PBX/CTX lines.
Data No.
System Software S6000 or below supported 16 Route Advance Blocks.
49
System Software S7000 or higher supports 32 Route Advance Blocks
PC Programming
¦+BCS
Display
Closed
Number
Enter
Data
Block
Function
No.
01~16
No.
4 9 : 0 1 = R T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + DI to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter the Function Number for Closed Number Block 01 of the Trunk
Default Values
Group or the Route Advance Block.
Not Specified

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear all data
N
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next memory
block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-30
Route Advance Block Assignment
1-1-50
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
3-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 91

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

Function Number 101~132 (Trunk Group 1~32, respectively) or 201~232 (Route Advance Block 1~32, respectively)
is assigned to Closed Number blocks.
1 - 92
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify up to 10 additional digits when a trunk in the Trunk group or
Submode
Route Advance block assigned in Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk Group/Route
1
Advance Assignment) is seized, and a number is dialed.
Data No.
Display
50
Closed
Data
Number
Add
Block
Digit
PC Programming
No.
01~16
10 Max.
¦+BCS
5 0 : 0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EK to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter digits to be added for Closed Number Block 01.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear all data
Q+ J to enter ,
Q+ L to enter #
N
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next memory
block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-49
Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 93

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

Example:
Station 100
Add
Dials 200
200
¤

System
System
1
2
Trunk
Group 02
St ¤
ation 200
Rings
To assign System 1 in System Programming:
1.
Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) assignment]. Assignment 2 401 (Closed Number Block 01).
2.
Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment). Assignment Block 01 102
(Trunk group 02).
3.
Memory Block 1-1-50 (CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment). Assignment Block 01 Assign 2.
4.
Digits are added when the Access Code is dialed from the internal dial tone.
5.
This memory block also applies to ISDN trunks.
1 - 94
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls on a
Submode
CO line.
1
Display
Data No.
51
Data
Setting Page
No.
Title
Data No.
PC Programming
5 1 : C O
P T N
A | 1
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the

default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
NO
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EAto access the memory block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.
S
Press
to access the next page.
T
Press
to access the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-59
Synchronous Ringing Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 95

Issue 7
Electra Elite
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
1 - 96
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls on a
Submode
PBX line.
1
Display
Data No.
52
Data
Setting Page
No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
5 2 : P B X
P T N
B | 1
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
NO
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EBto access the memory block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.
S
Press
to access the next page
T
Press
to access the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Do not program this memory block if Memory Block 1-1-59 (Synchronous Ringing Selection) is assigned YS.
Programming Manual
1 - 97

Issue 7
Electra Elite
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
1 - 98
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select a ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls on a Tie line
Submode
after the timeout set in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection).
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Page

No.
Title
Data
No.
53
PC Programming
5 3 : T L I
P T N
D | 1
¦+ALN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
NO
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to access the next page.
T
Press
to access the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 99

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-07
Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection
1-1-34
Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
1 - 100
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the ringing pattern or no ring sent to the Multiline Terminal
Submode
when an incoming call is received at the Automated Attendant and transferred.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Page

No.
Title
Data
No.
54
PC Programming
5 4 : A A
P T N
C | 1
¦+AU
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
NO
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + ED to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to access the next page
T
Press
to access the previous page
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Programming Manual
1 - 101

Issue 7
Electra Elite
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
NO
No Ring
1 - 102
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the ringing pattern or no ring to be used for DID calls.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Page

No.
TitleD
Data
No.
55
5 5 : D I D
P T N
A | 1
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+ALN
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 9
LK 10
LK 11
LK 12
NO
LK 13
LK 14
LK 15
LK 16
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to move to next page.
T
Press
to move to previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-20
DID Digit Length Selection
1-1-21
DID Digit Conversion Assignment
1-1-22
DID Digit Conversion Table
Programming Manual
1 - 103

Issue 7
Electra Elite
CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a pause time before dialed digits can be sent over a
Submode
CO/PBX line after the trunk is seized by a system user.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
Page

57
No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
5 7 : P R E P A U S E
1 s | 1
¦+BCM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NON
1s
2s
3s
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
4s
5s
6s
7s
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
8s
9s
10s
11s
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
12s
13s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to move to next page.
T
Press
to move to previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 104
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Synchronous Ringing Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not CO/PBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
59
5 9 : S Y N C H R O N U S
Y S
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + EI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-51
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
1-1-52
PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection

Notes

1.
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to incoming DID calls, off-hook ringing calls, or CO/PBX ring transfer calls.
2.
Do not program this memory block if YS is assigned.
Programming Manual
1 - 105

Issue 7
Electra Elite
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the outgoing dial digit for Code Restriction (except OCC Dial
Submode
Digit - Normal Dial). Program this assignment in one of two ways:
1
a) When the user dials digit(s) and there is a match, the system allows free dialing or denies
Data No.
dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching Table to Class
Assignment) for programming.
60
b) When a user dials digit(s) and there is no match, the system allows free dialing or denies
PC Programming
dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-65 (Code Restriction Class Allow/
¦+AC
Deny Selection) for programming.
Display

Data
No.
Title
6 0 : 8 D I G I T
T A B L E
0 0 / 0 0 = 9 1 1
8-Digit Dial Dial Digit
Matching Code (Maximum 8)
Table

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FK to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the data for Dial Code 00 for 8-Digit Matching Table 00.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Matching
Dial
Setting
Table
Code
Data
J to move the cursor left
00
00
911
L to move the cursor right
11
00
0
K~Ito enter numeric data
U
12
00
976
to clear data.
13
00/ 01/02
1800/1888/1877
The information that can be entered includes:
14
00
1X
Matching Table:
00~15 (8-digit)
15
00
X
Dial Code:
00~15
Dial Digit:
0~9, ,, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)
1 - 106
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Programming Procedures (Continued)
4
Operation data includes:

Operation Data
Dial Number
Operation
X
K~I,J,L
Q + G
P
KandA
Q +H
N
B~I
Q +I
,
J
Q +J
#
L
Q +L
N
5
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Dial Code. After all Dial Codes for 8-Digit Matching Table 00 are entered,
N
press
again to display 8 Digit Matching Table 01.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 5 to cycle through all Dial Codes for all 8-Digit Matching Tables. After the last Dial Code for the last 8-Digit
Matching Table is entered, the next memory block is displayed.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 - Code Restriction in this chapter.

Notes

1.
There are 16, 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each 8-digit table contains 16 Dial Codes. Each dial code can have eight
characters including digits and/or ,, #, X, P, or N characters.
2.
NANP = North American Numbering Plan.
Programming Manual
1 - 107

Issue 7
Electra Elite
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to program each 8-digit Matching Table to allow or deny assignment
Submode
per class. Classes 00 and 15 are fixed. Only classes 01~14 can be programmed.
1
Display
Data No.
Class
61
Data
No.
Table
Setting
No
Title 01~14
00~15
Data
PC Programming
6 1 : C L S 0 1 ( 0 0 ) =
Y S
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
NON
The shaded selection is the
(Allow)
(Deny)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01 Table 00.

Class 00 and 15 cannot be programmed.
Class 00 has no restrictions (Allow).
Class 15 has restricted outgoing (Deny).
Refer to the table on the next page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Table and then to the next Class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class and
Table.
5
After data for the last Table for the last Class is entered, the next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming.
Refer to Section 6 - Code Restriction in this chapter.
1 - 108
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Table 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Class
01
YS
NO
NO
NO
02
YS
NO
YS
NO
NO
03
YS
NO
NO
YS
NO
NO
04
YS
YS
NO
NO
05
YS
06
YS
07
YS
08
YS
09
YS
10
YS
11
YS
12
YS
13
YS
14
YS
YS = Allow
NO = Deny
NON = Blank
Programming Manual
1 - 109

Issue 7
Electra Elite
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify per Class whether or not Class Selection can override
Submode
System Speed Dial.
1
Display
Data No.
Class
62
Data
No.
Setting
No
Title
01~14
Data
PC Programming
6 2 : S P D O V R ( 0 1 ) = Y S
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
(Override)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each class.
5
After data for the last class is entered, the next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-18
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant

Notes

At system default, all stations are set to Class 00 to allow override for System Speed Dial.
1 - 110
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time for Exclusive Hold Recall. If No Limit is selected,
Submode
Exclusive Hold Recall is not provided.
1
Display
Data No.
63
Data
Setting
No
Title
Data
PC Programming
6 3 : H O L D
R E C L
1 . 0
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default. Times are in minutes.

3.0
5.0
8.0
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-03
Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)
1-2-23
System Call Park Recall Time Selection

Notes

When an Exclusive Hold call recalls, the held call switches to a Non-Exclusive Hold call.
Programming Manual
1 - 111

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Attendant Add-On Console Transfer/Camp-On
System Mode
Recall Time Selection
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to specify the time before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On from a
station with an Attendant Add-On Console recalls back to the originating station when the call
Data No.
is not answered.
64
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
¦+BM
No
Data
Title
6 4 : D S S
R E C L
1 . 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
The shaded selection is the
default. Times are in minutes.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
3.0
5.0
8.0
10.0

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-11
System Transfer/Camp-On Selection
1-1-12
System Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1 - 112
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

1.
When a station without an assigned Attendant Add-On Console transfers or camps-on a call to a station that
goes unanswered, the call recalls using Memory Block 1-1-12 (Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time
Selection).
2.
Time is valid only for stations assigned an Attendant Add-On Console in Memory Block 1-6-01 (Attendant
Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment). The Nkey on the station and the console are both
affected.
Programming Manual
1 - 113

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign Code Restriction Classes 01~14 as Allow or Deny. This
Submode
assignment is used when there is no match or there is an overlap (duplicate numbers in
1
tables with opposite assignments) of numbers in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
Data No.
Display
65
Class
Data
No.
PC Programming
No
Title
01~14
Function
¦+AC
6 5 : C L A S S
( 0 1 ) = Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
(Allow)
(Deny)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values
Class 01~04 Allow (YS)
Class 05~14 Deny (NO)
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Class. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last Class is assigned.
5
The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.

Notes

1.
When a match is not found or duplicate match is made with opposite assignments, the system uses this memory
block.
2.
When the interdigit dialing time duration exceeds 10 seconds while a restricted station user is dialing on an
outside line, the system automatically drops the call.
1 - 114
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the 8-Digit Matching Table by class for normal dialing as
Submode
used or unused. When unused is assigned, the system does not check during normal dialing
1
even when Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment) is
programmed.
Data No.
Display
66
Data
Page
PC Programming

No.
Title
No.
¦+AC
6 6 : N O R M A L
D I A L | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table 11
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for each Table.
S
Default Values
Press
to access the next page.
T
Tables 00~14 Used (Non-OCC and OCC)
Press
to access the previous page.
Table 15 Unused (OCC calls only)
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On and Off.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded
selection is the
Data
Restricted
Not restricted
default.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 115

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.
1 - 116
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
OCC Table Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign an Other Common Carrier (OCC) code (8-digit maximum) in
Submode
a table. A maximum of 16 codes can be assigned.
1
Display
Data No.
OCC
Data
Setting
Table
Data
67
No
01~16
PC Programming
6 7 : ( 0 1 ) =
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FG to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter the data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
OCC Table 01 ~ 15
Blank
OCC Table 16
1010XXX
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
U to clear data
The information that can be entered includes:
OCC Table:
01~16 (8-digit)
Setting Data:
0~9, ,, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)
Operation data includes:
Operation Data
Dial Number
Operation
X
K~I,J,L
Q + G
P
KandA
Q +H
N
B~I
Q +I
,
J
Q +J
#
L
Q +L
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next OCC table.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each OCC Table. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.
Programming Manual
1 - 117

Issue 7
Electra Elite
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign each 8-Digit Matching Table to each Other Common Carrier
Submode
(OCC) Code Table.
1
Display
Data No.
OCC
Data
Table
No.
Title
01~16
Page No.
68
PC Programming
6 8 : 8 D G
O C C ( 0 1 ) | 1
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Table 00
Table 01
Table 02
Table 03
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 04
Table 05
Table 06
Table 07
Page 2
Default not assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Table 08
Table 09
Table 10
Table11
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Table 12
Table13
Table14
Table15

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
S
Default Values
Press
to access the next page.
T
OCC Tables 01~15:
All Matching Tables Not Used
Press
to access the previous page.
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On and Off.
OCC Table 16:
Matching Tables 00~14 Not Used
Matching Table 15 Used
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded
area is the
Data
Unused
Used
default setting.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next OCC table. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last OCC data is entered.
5
The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.
1 - 118
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to restrict outgoing Tie line dialed digits.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
69
No.
Ti Title
tle
Data
PC Programming
6 9 : T I E
R E S T
= Y S
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + FI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values
Restriction
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.
Notes
When Tie lines are assigned code restriction, the Access Code used to dial out of the distant system must be entered
in front of the dialed number in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.
Programming Manual
1 - 119

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is
System Mode
Set
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to assign the Code Restriction Class when a station user sets the
Station Outgoing Lockout or when the Attendant sets Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout.
Data No.
Display
70
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AC
7 0 : R E S T
C L A S S = 1 5
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GK to access the memory block.
3
Enter the class restriction.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Class 15
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
N
4
Press
to write selected data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Section 6 Code Restriction in this chapter.
Notes
When a station is locked out, the Code Restriction Class Assignment of this memory block is used instead of the
Code Restriction Class assigned in Memory Block 4-07 [Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)] or 4-08
[Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)].
1 - 120
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time between receiving a CO call and sending a First
Submode
Delay Announcement to the calling party.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

Data
71
No.
Title
PC Programming
7 1 : M S G
S T A R T = 2 0
¦+AR
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
00
10
20
30
The shaded selection is the
default. Times are in seconds.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
40
50
60
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-72
First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This memory block does not display unless the MIFA-U10 ETU is installed.
Programming Manual
1 - 121

Issue 7
Electra Elite
First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of times a First Delay Announcement is
Submode
repeated.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

72
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
7 2 : M S G 1
S E N D = 1
¦+AR
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1
2
3
4
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5
6
7
8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-71
First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This memory block does not display unless the MIFA-U10 ETU is installed.
1 - 122
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to specify the time between the end of the First Delay Announcement
sending time and the start time of the Second Delay Announcement.
Data No.
Display
73
Data
Setting
PC Programming

No.
Title
Data
¦+AR
7 3 : M S G
I N T V L = 2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
00
10
20
30
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default. Times are in seconds.

40
50
60
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
1-1-75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This memory block does not display unless the MIFA-U10 ETU is installed.
Programming Manual
1 - 123

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of times a Second Delay Announcement is
Submode
repeated.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

74
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
7 4 : M S G 2
S E N D = 1
¦+AR
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1
2
3
4
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5
6
7
8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-73
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-1-75
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection
1-8-12
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
1-8-13
VRS Message Function Assignment
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This memory block does not display unless the MIFA-U10 ETU is installed.
1 - 124
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
General Description
1
Use this memory block to specify the interval time to repeat Second Delay Announcement to
the calling party.
Data No.
Display
75
Data
Setting
PC Programming

No.
Title
Data
¦+AR
7 5 : M S G 2
R P E T = 2 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
00
10
20
30
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default. Times are in seconds.

40
50
60
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-73
First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-1-74
Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection
3-41
Delay Announcement Assignment
Notes
This memory block does not display unless the MIFA-U10 ETU is installed.
Programming Manual
1 - 125

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not Barge-In Alert Tone is allowed.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
76
7 6 : A L E R T
T O N E = Y S
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
Notes
1.
Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor
before implementing the monitor of conversations. Some federal and state laws require a monitoring party to use
an alert tone to indicate monitoring and/or obtain consent from all parties to the conversation. Some laws provide
strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.
2.
When YS is assigned, both internal and external parties receive the alert tone.
1 - 126
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (CO)
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the delayed ringing time for incoming outside line calls.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

No.
Title
Data
77
7 7 : D R I N G ( 1 )
= 1 5 s
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCM
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GG to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter data.
Default Values

Setting data: KK~II
15 Seconds
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-26
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
Programming Manual
1 - 127

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign up to 15 Multiline Terminals to display ANI/Caller ID
Submode
Indication for normal incoming CO/PBX calls or CO/PBX calls ringing a Call Arrival (CAR)
1
key.
Data No.
Display
Tel Port No.
78
(00~99
Entry
A0~A9
Data
No.
B0~B9
PC Programming
No.
Title
01~15
CO)
¦+AI
7 8 : C A L L I D
0 1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GH to access the memory block.
3
Enter Entry No. 01 and Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
N
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Entry No. After each tel port No. is selected, press
again. A total of
15 entries can be made. After the last data is entered, the next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes

1.
To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming and CAR incoming calls, Caller ID Indication and Ring
Assignment must be programmed.
2.
Fifteen Multiline Terminals can be assigned system-wide to display ANI/Caller ID.
3.
A sixteenth terminal can be assigned to display ANI/Caller ID using another memory block.
1 - 128
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
BGM Port Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the CO/PBX port as a Background Music port.
Submode
1
Display
Data No.
Data
CO No.
79
No.
Title
(01~64)
PC Programming
7 9 : B G M
C 0 = 0 0
¦+BCS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + GI to access the memory block.
3
Enter the CO No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
2-06
Line Key Selection For Tenant Mode
4-12
Line Key Selection For Telephone Mode
Notes

When separate Music on Hold and Station Background Music are required, use an analog CO port to support Station
Background Music.
Programming Manual
1 - 129

Issue 7
Electra Elite
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify tone duration/interdigit time of Dual-Tone Multifrequency
Submode
(DTMF) signals for the ISDN trunk.
1
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

80
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
8 0 : M F
=
1 0 0 / 7 0
¦+AN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
The shaded selection is the
70/60
100/70
400/100
600/100
default. Times are in
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
milliseconds.
900/200
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
1 - 130
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time between each digit dialed before digits are sent over the
Submode
Network.
1
System Software S3000 Version 3.10 or higher is required.
Data No.
Display
81
Data
Setting
PC Programming

No.
Title
Data
¦+AN
8 1 : I S D N
D I A L
4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
2s
4s
8s
16s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
32s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
3-92
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 131

Issue 7
Electra Elite
CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to define a code to send to the CO in front of the dialed number to
Submode
allow completion of a CO call made to a Code restricted number set to allow.
1

Data No.
Code
Data
Table
Setting

82
No.
01~10
Data
PC Programming
8 2 : 0 1 =
¦+AC
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK1 + HB to access the memory block.
3
Enter the Feature Code for Restriction to Code Table 01.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter numeric data
N
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all code Tables. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes

Example: Set Code Table 01 to ,67
When Tel 100 user dials Access Code 9, Feature Code ,67 Telephone Number 12147517000 to access a line that is
code restricted, the code restriction starts at 12147517000. When code restriction is set to allow, the 1214 matches
and the call goes through. When Code restriction is deny, the 1214 matches and user receives a reorder tone and
ERROR is displayed on telephones that have a display.
1 - 132
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time allowed for paging.
Submode
2
Display

Data No.
Setting
Data
00
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 0 : P A G I N G
9 0 s
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4

90s
120s
The shaded selection is the
(No Limit)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-06
External Paging Timeout Selection
4-93
Internal Zone Paging Selection
Notes
Types of paging include:
¥
All Internal Zone (51)
¥
Internal Zone Paging (52~54)
¥
External Zone Paging (all speakers) (55)
¥
External Zone Paging (individual speakers) (56~58)
¥
Internal/External Zone Paging (59)
Programming Manual
1 - 133

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether signal tone or voice is used first for an intercom
Submode
call.
2
Display
Data No.

01
Setting
Data
Data
Title
No.
PC Programming
0 1 : V O I C E
C A L L
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
TONE
VOICE
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 +KAto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-03
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
Notes
1.
To switch from voice to tone signaling or from tone to voice, dial a station number, then dial 1.
2.
When tone signaling is programmed in this memory block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the
originator of the call dials 1.
3.
This memory block has no effect on incoming Voice Announcement Tie/DID line calls. Refer to Memory Block
1-1-34 (Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection).
1 - 134
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automatic Callback Release Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time allowed for an automatic callback before the
Submode
request is automatically canceled.
2
Display
Data No.

02
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 2 : C A L L
B A C K
3 0 m
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
30s
1m
2m
3m
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5m
10m
20m
30m

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 135

Issue 7
Electra Elite
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to determine the number of digits for station numbers. Either 2-digit
Submode
(00~99), 3-digit (000~999), or 4-digit (0000~9999) assignment is available.
2
Display
Data No.

03
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 3 : S T A . N O .
3 D G T
¦+BS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
2DGT
3DGT
4DGT
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KCto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
4-10
Station Number Assignment
Notes
1.
The Station Numbering Plan can be 2, 3, or 4 digits; however, only one plan can be used at a time.
2.
After a change is made in this memory block, all station numbers must be reassigned in Memory Block 4-10
(Station Number Assignment).
1 - 136
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of Call Arrival keys that can be used in the
Submode
system.
2
Display
Data No.

04
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 4 : C A R
A S S I G N | 0 1
¦+BK
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1Ports 01~32
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No Call Arrival Key
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~CO
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
Programming Manual
1 - 137

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KDto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
When LK is green, the block is assigned for CAR
No Call Arrival Key Blocks are assigned.
When LK is red, the block is not available for CAR (hardware is installed)
Hardware equipped ports are red.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite 192 system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS,
and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. When 32 station ports are being used, 88 remain for use as Call Arrival Keys.
2.
The Electra Elite 48 system allows a maximum of 32 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, and
OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. When 24 station ports are being used, eight remain for use as Call Arrival Keys.
3.
Using System Software S4000 or higher, the Electra Elite 48 system can have 16 CAR keys with 32
Station ports or 40 CAR keys with 8 station ports.
4.
Using System Software S5000 or higher, The total number of station and CAR ports are shared with PS
ports.
1 - 138
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Specified Station Access Code Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign specific stations for abbreviated dialing. Up to 24 stations
Submode
can be assigned.
2
Display
Data No.
Specified
Station
Access
08
Data
Code
Tel.Port

No.
Title
00~23
01~C0
PC Programming
0 8 : S P C L
E X T 0 0 = 0 1
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KHto access the memory block.
3
Enter the Specified Station Access Code 00 for the Tel Port No.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Access
Value
Code No.
J to move the cursor left
00
01
L to move the cursor right
01-23
Not Set
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear data
Setting data:
Tel. Port No. 01~120
Specified Station Access Code is 00~23
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next Specified Station Access Code.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Specified Station Access Code.
6
The next memory block is displayed.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-4-14
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-4-15
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 139

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Notes
1.
Specified stations can be accessed from intercom (ICM) dial tone or as an outside caller calling into the Electra
Elite 48/192 system Auto Attendant.
2.
The Specified Access Code is assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46 or 1-1-47 [Access Code (1-Digit/2-Digit)
Assignment].
1 - 140
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Customized Message 1~10 Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to program various messages for display at a station LCD. When a
Submode
user places an intercom (ICM) call from a station equipped with an LCD display to a station in
2
DND mode, the applicable programmed message displays at the calling station.
Data No.
Display

09~18
Setting
PC Programming
Data
Data
No.
(13 digits max.)
¦+BI
0 9 : D N D
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + KI~AH to access the memory block.
3
Enter the option.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Data No.
Message
J to move the cursor left
09
DND
L to move the cursor right
10
MEETING
K~Ito enter numeric data
U
11
BUSINESS TRIP
to clear data
12
NOT IN
13
WITH GUEST
14
OUT OF OFFICE
15~18
Not Specified
4
Enter the characters to be displayed. Refer to Section 9 Character Assignment.
N
5
After entering each message for memory block 1-2-9~18 (Custom Message 1~10 Assignment), press
to write the data.
The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
Ten messages are available, the first six are assigned at default.
2.
System Software S4000 or higher allows a message to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII
Character Code Tables. Follow the procedure in Section 9 Character Assignment on page 1-702.
Programming Manual
1 - 141

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Intercom Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select a ring pattern or turn the tone ON/OFF when intercom calls
Submode
are made.
2
Display
Data No.
19
Data
Setting
Page

No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
1 9 : I C M
P T N
B | 1
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
OFF
ON
A
B
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
C
D
E
F
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
G
H
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + L2 + AI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to go to the next page.
T
Press
to go to the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 142
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:
s= seconds
Line
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Pattern
Key
OFF
LK 1
ON
LK 2
A

LK 3
B
LK 4
C

LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
Programming Manual
1 - 143

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Intercom Ring Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to select a ring tone for intercom calls.
Submode
2
Display

Data No.
Setting
Data
20
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
2 0 : I C M
T O N E
A
¦+BI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
The available tones are:
Modulation (16 Hz)
Tone A = (480/600):
Tone B = (480/606):
Modulation (8 Hz)
Tone C = (1024/1285)
Tone D = (1024)
Tone E = (500)
Tone F = (1024/1285):
Modulation (16 Hz)
Modulation (16 Hz)
Tone G = (600/700):
Tone H = (1024)
Envelope 2 sec.
1 - 144
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
PS Telephone Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of PS II stations that can be used in the system.
Submode
2
System Software S5000 or higher is required.
Data No.
Display
21

PC Programming
Setting
Data
Title
Data
No.
¦+AP
2 1 : P H S
A S S I G N | 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~32
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 01~04
Port 05~08
Port 09~12
Port 13~16
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 17~20
Port 21~24
Port 25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 33~36
Port 37~40
Port 41~44
Port 45~48
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 49~52
Port 53~56
Port 57~60
Port 61~64
Default: No PS Telephone
Page 3 Ports 65~96
Blocks are assigned.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 65~68
Port 69~72
Port 73~76
Port 77~80
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port 81~84
Port 85~88
Port 89~92
Port 93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~C0
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 97~A0
Port A1~A4
Port A5~A8
Port A9~B2
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port B3~B6
Port B7~C0
Programming Manual
1 - 145

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BAto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Default Values
When LK is green, the block is assigned for PS
No PS Terminal Blocks are assigned.
When LK is red, the block is not available for PS
S
Hardware equipped ports are red.
Press
to cycle between pages.
Setting Data indicates the first port number on the applicable page.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite 48 system can support a maximum of 24 PS II stations.
2.
The Electra Elite 192 system can support a maximum of 40 PS II stations.
3.
The Electra Elite 48 system can have 32 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, CNF, and
OPX), Call Arrival Keys, and PS stations. If 24 station ports are being used, eight remain for use as PS stations.
4.
The Electra Elite 192 system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS,
CNF, and OPX), Call Arrival Keys, and PS stations.
5.
The total number of PS station ports are shared with the total number of Hardware and Software station ports.
1 - 146
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Call Forward No Answer Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time before incoming intercom calls or incoming CO/
Submode
PBX lines are forwarded to another station number when the called party does not answer.
2
Display
Data No.
Setting
Data
Title
22
Data
No.
PC Programming
2 2 : F W D
N O A N S
8 s
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
4s
8s
12s
18s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
24s
30s
60s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-42
Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 147

Issue 7
Electra Elite
System Call Park Recall Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time before a CO/PBX call recalls back to a station from
Submode
Call Park.
2
Display
Data No.
Setting
Data
Title
23
Data
No.
PC Programming
2 3 : P A R K
R E C L
1 . 0
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
The shaded selection is the
default. Times are in minutes.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
3.0
5.0
8.0
10.0
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 148
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the Access Code for Voice/Tone change or Step Call.
Submode
2
Display

Data No.
Dial
Setting
24
Data

No.
Data
No.
Title
PC Programming
2 4 : F E A
A C ( 0 ) = 0 0 4
¦+BA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BD to access the memory block.
3
Enter the Setting Data.

Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Dial Numbers
Jto move the cursor left
0 = 004
Lto move the cursor right
1 = 001
K~Ito enter numeric data
Q
2 = 002
3~5 = 000
+ , to enter ,
Q
6 = 006
+ # to enter #
7 = 007
8, 9 = 000
Setting Data
, = 003
Setting Code
Feature
# = 005
000
Not Used
001
Voice/Tone Switching
002
Step Call
003
Tone Override
004
Automatic Callback
005
Callback Request
006
Voice Over Originate
007
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next Dial No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 149

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-01
Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
1-8-26
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
Notes
1.
Features can be assigned to more than one dial number.
2.
To enter , or # under Dial Numbers Selection, press Q+ , or #.
1 - 150
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not a call alert tone is provided when Internal
Submode
Paging is used.
2
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
Title
25
No.
Data
PC Programming
2 5 : I N
P G
T O N
Y S
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 151

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the delayed ringing time for incoming internal calls.
Submode
2
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting

Title
No.
Data
26
2 6 : D R I N G ( 1 )
= 1 0 s
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BI
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + BFto access the memory block.
3
Enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
10 seconds
Jto move the cursor left
Lto move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting data: KK~II
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-37
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-38
Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
1 - 152
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
PS Out of Area Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the retry time when a PS II is Out of Area.
Submode
2
System Software S5000 or higher is required.
Data No.
Display
30
Data
Setting Data

Title
No.
Data 00~99
PC Programming
3 0 : O U T
T I M E R = 0 8 s
¦+AP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + CKto access the memory block.
3
Enter data.
Default Values

08 seconds
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
N
4
Press
to write data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
1.
When the PS Out of Area time is shorter than the Call Forward No Answer time, the caller receives an Out of
Area indication.
2.
This memory block is used to define the Time a system searches for a PS II before displaying Out of Area or
providing a busy tone to the Caller.
3.
When using Call Forward Busy/No Answer feature, verify that the time is compatible with this memory block.
Programming Manual
1 - 153

Issue 7
Electra Elite
IP Phone Block Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of IP Telephones that can be used with the
Submode
IPCA( )-U10 ETU - CPU board. A maximum of 30 can be assigned.
2
System Software S8000 or higher is required.
Data No.
Display
32
PC Programming
Data
Port
No.
Title
No.
¦+AH
3 2 : I P
A S S I G N
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1 Ports 01~32

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
Port 01~04 Port 05~08 Port 09~12 Port 13~16

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 17~20 Port 21~24
Port25~28
Port 29~32
Page 2 Ports 33~64

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
Port 33~36 Port 37~40
Port 41~44 Port 45~48

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 49~52 Port 53~56 Port 57~60 Port 61~64
Page 3 Ports 65~96

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
Port 65~68 Port 69~72
Port73~76
Port 77~80

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Port 81~84 Port 85~88 Port 89~92
Port93~96
Page 4 Ports 97~CO
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Port 97~A0 Port A1~A4 Port A5~A8 Port A9~B2
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Port B3~B6 Port B7~CO
1 - 154
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
LED Status
Off
On (Green)
On (Red)
Default is shaded, and no IP
Block Not
Phone Blocks are Assigned
Data
Not Assigned
IP Assigned)
Available
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK2 + 32 to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Data option.
S
Press
to go to the next page.
T
Press
to return to the previous page.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
1-2-04
Call Arrival Key Block Assignment
1-2-21
PS Telephone Block Assignment
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-40
LCR Class Selection
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment
4-56
SMDR Telephone Print Selection
4-67
IP Station Number Assignment
Notes
1.
The Electra Elite 192 system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS,
and OPX), Call Arrival keys, PS and IP Telephones. When 100 station ports are being used, 20 remain for use
as IP Telephones.
2.
The Electra Elite 48 system allows a maximum of 32 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, and
OPX), Call Arrival keys, PS and IP Telephones. When 24 station ports are being used, eight remain for use as IP
Telephones.
3.
Using System Software S4000 or higher, the Electra Elite 48 system can have 16 CAR keys with 32 station ports
or 40 CAR keys with eight station ports.
Programming Manual
1 - 155

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 156
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Bounce Protect Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a time for detection of a valid 0ff-hook indication that is long
Submode
enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new
3
off-hook indication from a Single Line Telephone or Voice Mail system.
Data No.
Display
01
Data
Setting
Page
No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 1 : B N C E
3 0 0 m s | 1
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0ms
100ms
200ms
300ms
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
400ms
500ms
600ms
700ms
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
800ms
900ms
1000ms
1100ms
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
1200ms
1300ms
1400ms
1500ms

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 157

Issue 7
Electra Elite
SLT Hookflash Signal Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether a line is held internally, or when behind a PBX, a
Submode
hookflash (HF) signal is sent to the line when a Single Line Telephone user performs a
3
hookflash.
Data No.
Display

02
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 2 : S I G N A L
H 0 L D
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
HOLD
FLASH
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 +KBto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-02
Hookflash Time Selection
4-24
SLT Hookflash Assignment
Notes
1.
When Hold is specified, the CO/PBX line is put on Exclusive Hold.
2.
When Hold is selected, the PBX/CTX line can receive the hookflash signal using Access Code 6# (default).
3.
When Flash is specified, press the hookswitch to send the hookflash signal to the PBX/CTX line.
1 - 158
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) circuit is connected
Submode
when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone user goes off-hook. After the
3
time expires, the PBR is disconnected. When the Single Line Telephone user dials a digit
before the time expires, a PBR interdigit time starts.
Data No.
Display
03

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BTI
0 3 : P B R
R L S
1 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
10s
20s
30s
40s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
50s
60s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-10
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 159

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not a dial pulse (DP) Single Line Telephone
Submode
provides a hookflash signal when the user presses 1 during an intercom or CO/PBX call.
3
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
04
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 4 : D I A L 1 F L S H
Y S
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KDto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-90
SLT Data Line Security Assignment
4-95
DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection
1 - 160
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Hookflash Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone
Submode
or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a valid hookflash.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
Page
05

No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 5 : F L S H
S T
2 9 0 | 1
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
40
90
140
190
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
The shaded selection is the
240
290
340
390
default. The times are in
Page 2
milliseconds.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
440
490
540
590
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
640
690
740
790
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S

Press
to cycle between pages.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-01
Bounce Protect Time Selection
1-3-06
Hookflash End Time Selection
Notes
Press hookswitch during CO/PBX call to place the line on hold or send hookflash to CO/PBX.
Programming Manual
1 - 161

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Hookflash End Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line
Submode
Telephone to receive a second dial tone.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting Page
06

No.
Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 6 : F L S H
E N D = 0 7 | 1
¦+BTI
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
00
01
02
03
(HST + 0 ms.)
(HST + 100 ms.)
(HST + 200 ms.)
(HST + 300 ms.)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
04
05
06
07
(HST + 400 ms.)
(HST + 500 ms.)
(HST + 600 ms.)
(HST + 700 ms.).
The shaded selection is the
default.
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
HST = Hookflash Start Time
08
09
10
11
(HST + 800 ms.)
(HST + 900 ms.) (HST + 1000 ms.) (HST + 1100 ms.)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
12
13
14
15
(HST + 1200 ms.) (HST + 1300 ms.) (HST + 1400 ms.) (HST + 1500 ms.)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to cycle between pages.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-05
Hookflash Start Time Selection
1 - 162
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to the
Submode
voice mail when a call is forwarded.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
07
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 7 : V M
A C E S S =
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Enter data.
Default Values

All Blank
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Q+ J to enter ,
Q+ L to enter #
Setting Data: 0~9, ,, #
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 163

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the delay time before dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF)
Submode
tones are sent from Voice Mail Interface (VMI) ports.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
08
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 8 : V M
D E L A Y
=
1 s
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0s
1s
2s
3s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
4s
5s
6s
8s

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 +KHto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Notes
This memory block applies to both digital voice mail and analog voice mail ports.
1 - 164
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time a disconnect signal is sent to the voice mail
Submode
system.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
09
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 9 : V M
D S C O N = 1 . 5 s
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0.5s
1.0s
1.5s
2.0s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
3.0s
3.5s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + KI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 165

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) duration and interdigit
Submode
time for voice mail.
3
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
10
1 0 : V M
M F = 1 1 0 / 8 0
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+AV
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
The shaded selection is the
60/70
110/80
410/100
610/100
default for Duration and
Interdigit Time. Times are in
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
milliseconds.
810/190
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK3 + AK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX key to change data option.
Default Values
Duration time: 110 ms.
Interdigit Time: 80 ms.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next memory block.
P
5
Press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
1 - 166
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time
System Mode
Selection
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify maximum time, in minutes, before the system automatically
4
disconnects a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.
Data No.
Display
00

Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+AT
0 0 : A U T O
D I S
0 6 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Display
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 to access the memory block.
3
Enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Uto clear data
Setting Data: 001~999 Minutes
000 No Limit
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Notes
This block is used for Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, Call Forward Off-Premise, and
Tie line tandem features.
Programming Manual
1 - 167

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time
System Mode
Selection
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) remains connected
4
after the Automated Attendant message is played when a calling party calls in through an
Automated Attendant trunk.
Data No.
01
Display

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AU
0 1 : A A
P B R T I M E 2 0 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
5s
10s
20s
30s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
40s
50s
60s
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Notes
After PBR is connected, dialing must be completed in the specified time. After the first digit is dialed, interdigit time
(default 7 sec.) controls the PBR time. Dialing the third digit exceeds the 20 sec. default, and the PBR is
disconnected.
1 - 168
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
General Description
4
Use this memory block to specify the time that a call rings at the destination station before the
automated attendant rings a programmed station.
Data No.
Display
02

PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+AU
0 2 : A A
D L Y R N G

T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4

10s
20s
30s
The shaded selection is the
(No Limit)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-01
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)
4-02
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)
Programming Manual
1 - 169

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Notes
Example:
( D)¤
System

PSTN
¤(A) 100
¤(C) 102
Electra Elite
¤(B) 101 ¤(B) 101
(C) 102
Trunk 1
¤
¤(A) 100
Time Elapsed
In this example, Public Switching Telephone Network (PSTN) and the system
are connected by Trunk 1. Stations A (extension 100) and C (extension 102) are
ring assigned to Trunk 1. Trunk 1 is assigned to Automated Attendant trunk.
1.
To speak to station user A, the outside user D dials the telephone number for TRUNK 1, confirms the Automated
Attendant message, and dials extension 100.
2.
In the example at station A:
¥
The ICM LED blinks and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.
¥
The call can be answered by lifting the handset.
¥
Station users B and C cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.
3.
In the example, if station user A does not answer in the specified time:
¥
The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.
¥
Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.
4.
Select (No Limit) to disable this feature.
1 - 170
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect Time
System Mode
Selection
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the time the Automated Attendant rings a station before the
4
caller is automatically disconnected.
Data No.
Display
03

Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+AU
0 3 : A A
D I S
2 m
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1m
2m
3m
4m
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Notes
When the called party does not answer in the programmed time, the call is dropped.
Programming Manual
1 - 171

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a special number to be output from Station Message Detail
Submode
Recording (SMDR) to indicate an automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer.
4
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
04
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 4 : T A N D
E X T = 9 9 9
¦+AT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JD to access the memory block.
3
Enter the Table Number and Setting Data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
3-digit number = 999
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data (Allowed):
2-Digit Number: 00~99
3-Digit Number: 000~999
4-Digit Number: 0000~9990
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
Notes
1.
When the system is powered up initially, this block defaults to 3-digit number 999.
2.
When 2-digit station numbers are selected, this block defaults to 99.
3.
When 4-digit station numbers are selected, this block defaults to 9999.
1 - 172
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Submode
feature follows the Night Mode assignment.
4
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
05
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 5 : T A N D
B Y
N T
N O
¦+AT
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JEto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-27
Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment
1-1-33
Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection
3-05
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection
3-06
Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 173

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response
System Mode
Selection
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify how a call answered by the Automated Attendant should be
4
processed when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tone is not received.
Data No.
Display

08
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 8 : A A
R E S
N O R M A L
¦+AU
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NORMAL
RELEAS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Notes
1.
When NORMAL is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or
during the Automated Attendant Push Button Receiver (PBR) Release Time (20-second default), the system
rings selected stations using Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or Memory Block 4-02
[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].
2.
When RELEAS is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or during
the Automated Attendant PBR Release Time (20-second default), the system drops the call after 30 seconds
regulated by a fixed time.
1 - 174
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant PBR Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether the Push Button Receiver (PBR) can receive
Submode
dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling while the Automated Attendant is sending the
4
message or after the message is complete.
Data No.
Display
09
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 9 : P B R
S T R T
F R
¦+AU
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
FR
AF
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Setting Data:
FR: While the Automated Attendant sends the message.
AF: After the Automated Attendant sends the message.
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Notes
When FR is assigned, the Automated Attendant message send start time and the PBR connected to Automated
Attendant trunk start time are the same.
Programming Manual
1 - 175

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode
System Mode
Selection
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify whether or not Automated Attendant messages can be
4
used in a Day/Night Mode setting.
Data No.
Display
11
A.A.
Msg.
Day/
PC Programming
Data
NO.
Night
Setting
No.
Title
1~8
Mode
Data
¦+AU
1 1 : A A M S G 1 ( D Y ) = N O
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 + JJAA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for AA MSG1 in DY (Day) Mode.

Use the following to change Message No.:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Qto toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode
N
4
Press
to write the data, and display the next message.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all eight messages. The next memory block is displayed.
Q
6
Return to this memory block, toggle
to select NT (Night) and repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for all messages for night Mode.
The next memory block is displayed.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
1 - 176
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Message to Tenant Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign Automated Attendant Messages to a Tenant.
Submode
4
Display
Data No.
AA MSG
Setting
12
Data
Title
No.
(1~8)
Data
PC Programming
1 2 : A A
1 T N A T = 0 0
¦+AU
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAB to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to change the Tenant No. or AA MSG No.
Default Values

All Automated Attendant Messages:
Use the following to enter data:
Tenant No. 00
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter Tenant or Message Number
N
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next message.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all AA messages. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Notes
When a tenant is not assigned to a specific automated message, the Automated Attendant sends the message
assigned in Memory Block 1-4-11 (Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection).
Programming Manual
1 - 177

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time
System Mode
Assignment
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the time, in seconds, before the Automated Attendant
4
answers an incoming CO/PBX call.
Data No.
Display
13
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG.
Setting
No.
Title
(1~8)
Data
¦+AU
1 3 : A A D L Y 1
= 0 4 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAC to access the memory block.
3
Select each MSG., and enter its delay time.
Default Values

All Automated Attendant Messages:
Use the following to enter data:
4 sec.
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~I to enter delay time or select MSG
Delay limit:KK~IIseconds.
N
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all messages. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
1 - 178
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit)
System Mode
Assignment
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify a 1-digit code to route an incoming call from the Automated
4
Attendant.
Data No.
Display
14
DIAL.
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG. No.
Function
No.
Title
(1~8) (0~9)
Code
¦+AU
1 4 : A A
A C
1 - O = 0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAD to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to select MSG. number, and enter function code and Dial No. for each

Default Values
AA MSG.
Dial
Function

Contents
Use the following to enter data:
Number
Code
Jto move the cursor left
Specified Station
0
030
Call (0)
Lto move the cursor right
1
010
Station Number
K~Ito enter numerical data
2
010
Station Number
Setting Data (Allowed):
3
010
Station Number
Function Code
001~053
4 ~ 9
000
Unregistered

000 is unused.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next dial number.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 2, Dial No. 0 is displayed.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 3, Dial No. 0 is displayed.
7
Continue this cycle for all Dial NOs. for all messages. The next memory block is displayed.
P
8
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Programming Manual
1 - 179

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

1.
Function 011 (Bypass Automated Attendant) uses Memory Blocks 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)] to ring according to those assignments.
2.
Functions 015~016 (Ring Internal Paging Zone A/B/C) require assigning the following to ring the desired station:
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]
Memory Block 4-93 (Internal Zone Paging Selection).
3.
When a caller receives a busy signal after being transferred by the Automated Attendant, the following Fixed
Access Codes apply:
A Step Call
J Receive a second dial tone
L CO rings based on Day/Night Ring Assignment.
1 - 180
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Function Codes
Function
Function
Contents
Contents
Code
Code
000
Unregistered
027
Not Used
001
Automated Attendant Message (1)
028
Not Used
002
Automated Attendant Message (2)
029
Not Used
Specified Station Call (00). Refer to
003
Automated Attendant Message (3)
030
Memory Block 1-2-08 (Specified Station
Access Code Assignment)
004
Automated Attendant Message (4)
031
Specified Station Call (01)
005
Automated Attendant Message (5)
032
Specified Station Call (02)
006
Automated Attendant Message (6)
033
Specified Station Call (03)
007
Automated Attendant Message (7)
034
Specified Station Call (04)
008
Automated Attendant Message (8)
035
Specified Station Call (05)
009
Not Used
036
Specified Station Call (06)
010
Internal Number (Station Number)
037
Specified Station Call (07)
011
Bypass Automated Attendant
038
Specified Station Call (08)
012
Not Used
039
Specified Station Call (09)
013
Not Used
040
Specified Station Call (10)
014
Not Used
041
Specified Station Call (11)
015
Ring Internal Paging Zone A
042
Specified Station Call (12)
016
Ring Internal Paging Zone B
043
Specified Station Call (13)
017
Ring Internal Paging Zone C
044
Specified Station Call (14)
018
Not Used
045
Specified Station Call (15)
019
Not Used
046
Specified Station Call (16)
020
DSS 1 Call
047
Specified Station Call (17)
021
DSS 2 Call
048
Specified Station Call (18)
022
DISA Access Code
049
Specified Station Call (19)
023
Not Used
050
Specified Station Call (20)
024
Not Used
051
Specified Station Call (21)
025
Not Used
052
Specified Station Call (22)
026
Not Used
053
Specified Station Call (23)
Programming Manual
1 - 181

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit)
System Mode
Assignment
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify a 2-digit code to route an incoming call from the Automated
4
Attendant.
Data No.
Display
15
Dial.
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG.
No.
Function
No.
Title
(1~8) 00~99
Code
¦+AU
1 5 : A A
A C 1 0 O = 0 3 0
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAE to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to select each MSG., and enter Function Code and

Default Values
two-digit Dial No.
Dial No.
Funct. Code
Contents

Use the following to enter data:
00 ~ 50
030
Specified Station Call (0)
Jto move the cursor left
Bypass Automated
51
011
L
Attendant
to move the cursor right
52
015
Paging Zone A Call
K~Hto enter numerical data
53
016
Paging Zone B Call
54
017
Paging Zone C Call
55 ~ 99
000
Not Used
N
4
Press
to write the data and to advance the Dial No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. Message 2, Dial No. 00 is displayed.
6
Continue this cycle until the Dial number function codes are assigned to all AA MSGs. The next memory block is displayed.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
1 - 182
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Message Repeat Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of times a message from the Automated
Submode
Attendant Is repeated to the calling party.
4
Display
Data No.
16
Data
AA MSG.
Setting
No.
Title
(1~8)
Data
PC Programming
1 6 : A A M S G 1
1
¦+AU
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1
2
3
4
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
5
6
7
8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the number of times a message is Default Values
repeated.
All Messages One Time
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Programming Manual
1 - 183

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold
System Mode
Tone Selection
1
Submode
General Description
4
Use this memory block to specify the tone to be sent to the outside party after the Automated
Attendant Delay Announcements are played.
Data No.
Display
17
Data
Setting
Data
PC Programming
No.
Title
¦+AU
1 7 : A A
H O L D
R B T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
RBT
MOH
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
Example: To change Ringback tone to Music On Hold, press CO/PBX LK2.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
1 - 184
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the order for the Automated Attendant messages that are
4
played in Delayed Announcement Mode.
Data No.
Display
18
Setting
PC Programming
Data
1st MSG
Data
No.
1~8
Title
2nd MSG
Page
¦+ AU
1 8 : ( 1 ) 2 N D = N O N E | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NONE
MSG1
MSG2
MSG3
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
MSG4
MSG5
MSG6
MSG7
The shaded selection is the
default.
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
MSG8

LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX to select the desired MSGs.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
1st MSG No. 1~8: Not Specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K ~ I to enter numeric data
S to toggle between pages
N
4
to write the data and advance to the next 1st MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each 1st MSG. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 185

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
1 - 186
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement
System Mode
Interval Time Selection
1
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time, in seconds or minutes, between the Automated
4
Attendant Delay Announcement messages.
Data No.
Display
19
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
Page
PC Programming
¦+ AU
1 9 : 1 S T
I N T R
4 m | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0s
10s
20s
30s
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
1m
2m
3m
4m
The shaded selection is the
default.
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
5m
10m
20m
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the interval time.
Default Values
Example: To change 4 minutes to 10 seconds, press Page 1 CO/PBX LK2.
4 minutes
S
Press
to toggle between pages.
4
Press N to write the data and advance to the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-20
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 187

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement
System Mode
Disconnect Time Selection
1
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to establish the time, in seconds or minutes, the Automated Attendant
4
rings the station before disconnecting the caller. This memory block only applies when the
Automated Attendant is set to Delay Announcement Mode.
Data No.
20
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
Page
¦+ AU
2 0 : 2 N D
I N T R 3 0 s | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0s
10s
20s
30s
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
1m
2m
3m
4m
The shaded selection is the
default.
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
5m
10m
20m

LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the disconnect time.
Default Values
Example: To change 30 seconds to 10 seconds, press Page 1 CO/PBX LK2.
30 seconds

S
Press
to toggle between pages.
N
4
Press
to write the selected data and advance to the next memory block.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-4-18
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment
1-4-19
Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection
1 - 188
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Automated Attendant Extension Number Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played when a
Submode
DID call is received.
4
System Software S5000 is required.
Data No.
Display
21
PC Programming
Data
AA MSG
Setting
No.
Title
1~8
Data
¦+ AU
2 1 : A A
M S G
1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBA to access the memory block.
3
Enter Setting Data to each AA MSG.
Default Values

No Message Specified
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear all data when cursor is at setting position
Setting Data limits:
2-Digit Station Number: 10~99
3-Digit Station Number: 100~999
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~9999
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46,47
Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection

Notes

This number is the same as Extension Number, CAR key number, and ACD/UCD/SCD. Pilot number cannot be
assigned.
Programming Manual
1 - 189

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Automated Attendant Direct Extension Ring
System Mode
Assignment
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played for direct
4
transfer to the extension number.
Data No.
System Software S5000 is required.
22
Display
PC Programming
AA MSG
Setting
Data
¦+ AU
1~8
Data
No.
Title
2 2 : A A
T R F
1 =
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBB to access the memory block.
3
Use the Dial pad to enter Station Number for each AA MSG.
Default Values

No Message Specified
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear all data when cursor is at setting position
Station Number limits:
2-Digit Station Number: 10~99
3-Digit Station Number: 100~999
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~9999
N
4
Press
to write the data and display the next AA MSG.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46,47
Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1 - 190
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

The CAR Number and AA number can also be assigned as Extension Number. When Extension Number is not
assigned, the Memory Block 1-4-08 time is followed.
Programming Manual
1 - 191

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 192
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
SMDR Print Format
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not all digits are printed. When ALL is specified,
Submode
all digits are printed. When MSK (Mask) is specified, the last four digits are masked and
5
printed as XXXX.
Data No.
Display

02
Data
Setting

Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 2 : F O R M A T
A L L
¦+AS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
ALL
MSK
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 193

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Printer Connected Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to program printer connection. When the printer is not connected to
Submode
the system, an alarm sounds at stations connected to Ports 01 and 02.
5
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
13

Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
1 3 : P R I N T E R
N O
¦+AS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
PC
YES
The shaded selection is the
SMDR OFF CSV Format SMDR ON
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 + AC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-14
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
1-8-35
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
1-8-36
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment

Notes

When PC is assigned, the SMDR output data can be saved to a CSV (Comma-Separated Values) format file on a PC.
The file can then be opened using PC software (i.e., MS Excel) to analyze, filter, and/or sort the data.
1 - 194
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Printer Line Feed Control Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the data format to be sent to the Station Message Detail
Submode
Recording (SMDR) printer. When YS is set, a return is provided with the call record.
5
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
14

PC Programming
1 4 : L I N E
F E E D
Y S
¦+AS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 + AD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-02
SMDR Print Format
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1-5-25
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 195

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

Example: Settings to specify the format of communication data output to the printer.
¥
Line Feed control in effect.
07/03/92
09:00
08-05-12
OG 123
00:15:32
102885167537000
LCR
FWD234
12345678
¥
No Line Feed control.
07/03/92
09:00
08-05-12
OG 123
00:15:32
10288516753700
LCR
IWD234
12345678
(No Limit)
1 - 196
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the minimum call time before the Station Message Detail
Submode
Recording (SMDR) outputs a record of the outgoing CO/PBX call.
5
Display
Data No.

Setting
Data
Title
25

Data
No.
PC Programming
2 5 : S M D R
T I M = 0 4 0 s
¦+AS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 +BE to access the memory block.
3

Use the following to enter data:
Default Values
J
040 seconds
to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Minimum time assignment is 000 sec.
Time assignment can be set from 000~099 sec. in increments of 10.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-05
Start Time Selection
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 197

Issue 7
Electra Elite
SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the call records to be output from the Station Message
Submode
Detail Recording (SMDR): OUT = print outgoing call records only, INC = print incoming call
5
records only, ALL = print incoming and outgoing call records.
Data No.
Display
26
Data
Setting

Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
2 6 : P R I N T
M O D = O U T
¦+AS
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
ALL
OUT
INC
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK5 +BFto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection
1 - 198
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
6
Use this memory block to assign an Attendant Add-On Console to a telephone port number.
Data No.
Display
01
Data
DSS No.
Data

No.
Title
1~4
Setting
PC Programming
0 1 : D S S
1 = P
0 1
¦+BTD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6 to access this memory block.
3
Enter data.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
DSS
Tel Port No.
J to move the cursor left
1
¨
01
L to move the cursor right
2
¨
02
K~Ito enter numeric data
3
¨
01
4
¨
02
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next DSS No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each DSS. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment

Notes

1.
The telephone with an Attendant Add-On Console connected must be specified by port number.
2.
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to a system.
3.
A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to one telephone.
Programming Manual
1 - 199

Issue 7
Electra Elite
DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether Voice or Tone signaling is to be used first when
Submode
calling an extension from an Attendant Add-On Console.
6
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
03
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 3 : V O I C E
C A L L
¦+BTD
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
TONE
VOICE
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6.
3
UseJto move cursor to the second Data No. position, and pressCto access the memory block.
4
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
5
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment

Notes

1.
To switch Voice/Tone signaling, dial 1 from a station.
2.
When tone signaling is programmed in this memory block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the
Direct Station Select (DSS) station user dials 1 to switch it to Voice.
1 - 200
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign functions to the Attendant Add-On Console keys.
Submode
6
Display
DSS Button
Data No.
Data
No.
No.
Setting
Page
No.
1~4
01~60
Data
No.
05
0 5 : 1 / 0 1 = T E L 0 1
| 1
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTD
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
TEL01
INT A
INT B
NON
(01~120)
(Paging Zone)
(Paging Zone)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
INT C
INT ALL
EXT A
EXT B
(Paging Zone)
(Paging Zones)
(Paging Zone)
(Paging Zone)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
EXT C
EXT ALL
MSG
NT MOD
(Paging Zone)
(Paging Zones)
(Waiting)
(Night Mode)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
IN OUT
Shaded area indicates default.
(Attendant
TRF
CO
Station
(Transfer)
(Trunk 01~64)
Outgoing
Lockout)
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
VM
VB
DPH 1
DPH 2
(Live Record)
(Mail Box)
(Doorphone)
(Doorphone)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
RELAY 0
RELAY 1
(General
(General
Purpose)
Purpose)
Programming Manual
1 - 201

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6. UseJto move cursor to the second Data No. position, and press Eto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key and dial pad keys to change the data
Default Values
option:
DSS Key No.
Data Setting
Functions can be assigned to keys 01~60 on Attendant Add-On Consoles 1~4.
No.
Functions to be programmed:
01
TEL No. 01
¥
Station No. 01~120
02
TEL No. 02
¥
~
~
Internal Paging Zone A
¥
Internal Paging Zone B
48
TEL. No. 48
¥
Internal Paging Zone C
49
Night Mode Switching
¥
Internal Paging Zone ALL
Internal Paging Zone A
50
(INT A)
¥
External Paging Zone A
Internal Paging Zone B
¥
External Paging Zone B
51
(INT B)
¥
External Paging Zone C
Internal Paging Zone C
52
¥
External Zone Paging ALL
(INT C)
¥
Message Waiting
All Internal Paging Zone
1~4
53
(INT ALL)
¥
Night Mode Switching
54
Vacant
¥
Transfer
55
Message Waiting (MSG)
¥
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout
External Paging Zone A
¥
56
CO (Trunk 01~64)
(EXT A)
¥
Feature Access Key with Live Record
External Paging Zone B
57
¥
(EXT B)
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number
¥
External Paging Zone C
DPH 1 & 2
58
(EXT C)
¥
General Purpose Relay 0 and 1
External Paging Zone All
59
(EXT ALL)
DSS Key Number
60
Transfer (TRF)

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
01

06
L to move the cursor right
07
12
K~Ito enter numeric data
Nto write selected data
13
18
Sto go to the next page
19
24
T to go to the previous page
25
30
31

36
37
42
43
48
49
54
55
60
1 - 202
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Program N
ming Procedures (Continued)
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all buttons for each DSS. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-01
Attendant Add-On Console to Telephone Port Assignment
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment

Notes

1.
When TEL is assigned to a line key, the red LED is used to indicate Station Status.
2.
When a function (e. g., Message or Paging) that does not require a green LED is assigned to a 2-color LED key,
the green LED does not function.
3.
Telephone number setting data for telephone sets is determined by the number of installed ESI(8)-U10 ETUs.
4.
Message Waiting and Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout cannot be assigned on the same console.
5.
DSS/CO keys should be programmed on line keys 1~48 only.
6.
The Feature Access key with Live Record has seven features:
Feature No.
Feature
00
Record Start
01
Record Pause/Restart
02
Record Erase
03
Record Finish
04
Record Erase/Restart
05
Pager
06
Record Confirmation
07
Live Monitoring
Each function can be assigned by dialing the Feature No. using the dial pad after pressing LK1 on page 3.
7.
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number can be entered using two, three, or four digits of the Mailbox number on the
dial pad. This feature is used for Live Record addressing. The Live Record feature must be assigned to a line key
on the console also.
Programming Manual
1 - 203

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Message Board Lamp Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign mailbox numbers for each Message Display Board.
Submode
6
Display
Data No.
Data
Board
Lamp
Setting
Setting
No.
No.
No.
Data 1
Data 2
07
0 7 :
1 0 1 N O N
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTB
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NON
MSG
The shaded selection is the
(Unassigned)
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6. UseJto move cursor to the second Data No. position, and pressGto access the memory block.
3
Press line key to select Setting Data 1. Use the dial pad to select Setting Data 2.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor to the left
L to move the cursor to the right
K~I to enter numeric data
U to clear all data
Setting Data 2: Mailbox No.
2-digits 10 ~ 99
3-digits 100 ~ 999
4-digits 1000 ~ 9999
N
4
Press
to write the selected data. The next Lamp No. is displayed. After all 48 lamps are assigned, the next Board No. is
displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each lamp (01~48) and for each board (1~8). The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-2
Telephone Type Assignment
1 - 204
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Attendant Transfer Selection During Live Record
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to control the Attendant DSS/BLF transfer while the Attendant is
Submode
engaged in Live Record. The call is transferred to either the DSS/BLF extension or the voice
6
mailbox of the DSS/BLF extension. When YS is selected, the call is transferred to the DSS/
BLF extension. When NO is selected, the Live Record session is addressed to that DSS/BLF
Data No.
extension (no transfer).
08
Display
PC Programming

Setting
Data

Title
Data
No.
¦+ BTD
0 8 : D S S
S E L
Y S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK6. UseJto move cursor to the second Data No. position, and pressHto access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 205

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 206
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Doorphone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to enable the doorphones in System Programming.
Submode
7
Display

Data No.
Data

Title
No.
00
0 0 : D P H
A S S I G N
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BTP
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
DPH1
DPH2
DPH3
DPH4
Default not assigned.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 to access the memory block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each doorphone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line
key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area is
the default setting.
Data
No
Yes
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-01
Doorphone Display Time Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 207

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Doorphone Display Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time, in seconds, a doorphone call signals a station
Submode
before it times out.
7
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
01
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
0 1 : D P H
T I M E R
1 0 s
¦+BTP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
10s
30s
60s
90s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KA to access the memory block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1 - 208
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
External Speaker Connection Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not external speakers are connected to the
Submode
system.
7
Display
Data No.

Data
02
No.
Title
PC Programming
0 2 : E S P
C O N N
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
ESP A
ESP B
ESP C
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KB to access the memory block.
3
Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each ESP Zone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line
key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
Data
No
Yes
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-03
External Paging Alert Tone Selection

Notes

Only three external speaker zones can be connected to the system.
Programming Manual
1 - 209

Issue 7
Electra Elite
External Paging Alert Tone Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not a paging alert tone is sent on External Zone
Submode
Paging (all speakers/individual speaker).
7
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
03

Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 3 : E S P
T O N E
Y S
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
YS
NO
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 + KC to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime Selection
1 - 210
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to turn doorphone Off/On or specify the doorphone ring pattern.
Submode
Doorphones can be individually assigned.
7
Display
Data No.

Data
Setting
Title
04
No.
Data
PC Programming
0 4 : D P H 1 C Y C L
O N | 1
¦+BTP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Page 1
LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
OFF
ON
A
B
The shaded selection is the
default.

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8

C

D

E

F
Page 2

LK 1

LK 2

LK 3

LK 4
G

H

LK 5

LK 6

LK 7

LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KD to access the memory block.
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Default Values
Press
to alternate pages.
All doorphones are LK2
N
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four doorphones. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-05
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection
4-03
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-04
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
Programming Manual
1 - 211

Issue 7
Electra Elite
The Doorphone Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:
s= seconds
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
Line
Pattern
Key
Tone
LK 1
Off
Tone
LK 2
On
A

LK 3
B

LK 4
C

LK 5
D

LK 6
E

LK 7
F

LK 8
LK 1
G
(Pg. 2)
LK 2
H
(Pg. 2)
1 - 212
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the doorphone ringing frequency. Doorphones can be
Submode
individually assigned.
7
Display
Data No.

Setting
Data
Title
05

Data
No.
PC Programming
0 5 : D P H 1 F R E Q
C
¦+BTP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The available tones are:
Tone
Frequency
Tone A
480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone B
480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)
Tone C
1024/1285
Tone D
1024
Tone E
500
Tone F
1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone G
600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)
Tone H
1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)
N
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four doorphones. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 213

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-00
Doorphone Assignment
1-7-04
Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection
4-03
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)
4-04
Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)
1 - 214
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
External Paging Timeout Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the time allowed for External Paging before timeout and
Submode
release of the paging circuit.
7
Display
Data No.

Setting
Data
Title
Data
06
No.
PC Programming
0 6 : E S P
T I M E R
5 . 0
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default. Times are in minutes.

3.0
5.0
8.0
(No Limit)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 215

Issue 7
Electra Elite
External Ring Relay Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign a distinctive ringing control/interval pattern to relay circuits.
Submode
7
Display
Data No.
Ext
Ring
Data
Relay Setting
07
No.
Title
(1~4)
Data
PC Programming
0 7 : E X T
R I N G 1 = P T 3
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
PT1
PT2
PT3
PT4
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default.
PT5
PT6
PT7
(Continuous

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press L1 + LK7 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
A~Dto enter external ring relay
N
4
Press
to write the data.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four Ring Relays. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-2-00
Internal Paging Timeout Selection
1-7-02
External Speaker Connection Selection
2-08
ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment
1 - 216
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

An External Tone relay or the Night Chime relay must be assigned in Memory Block 2-08 (ECR Relay to Tenant
Assignment) before the tone is generated.

s= seconds
Pattern
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Continuous
Programming Manual
1 - 217

Issue 7
Electra Elite
External Speaker Chime Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether a normal paging alert tone (4 tones) sounds before
Submode
the speech path is established, a chime sounds at the start of the call, or a chime sounds at
7
the start and end of the call.
Data No.
Display

08
Setting
Data

Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 8 : S P K
O N
P R T
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
PRT
C-S
C-B
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
PRT = Normal Paging Tone Before the Page
C-S = Chime - Start Only (4 Tone Chime)
C-B = Chime - Both Start and End (4 Tone Chime)
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7+ KH to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-03
External Page Alert Tone Selection
1-7-09
External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection

Notes

Memory Block 1-7-03 (External Paging Alert Zone Selection) must be enabled for this memory block to function.
1 - 218
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block only when paging alert tone (four tones) is assigned in memory block
Submode
1-7-08 (External Speaker Chime Selection). This memory block specifies the delay time (in
milliseconds) after an external paging code is dialed before the paging alert tone is provided.
7
Data No.
Display
09
Setting
Data

Title
Data
No.
PC Programming
0 9 : S T A R T
=
7 0 0 | 1
¦+BP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
000
100
200
300
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
400
500
600
700
The shaded selection (in ms) is
Page 2
the default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
800
900
1000
1100
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
1200
1300
1400
1500
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK7 +KI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
S
Press
to go to page 2.
T
Press
to return to page 1.
Press + to go from page 2 to page 1. System Software S4000 or higher is required.
Press = to go from page 1 to page 2. System Software S4000 or higher is required.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-7-08
External Speaker Chime Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 219

Issue 7
Electra Elite
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 220
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR
System Mode
Selection
1
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether the four Push Button Receiver (PBR) circuits in the
8
CPUB( )-U10 ETU/MBD-U10 Unit are used for Single Line Telephones or Automated
Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Data No.
01
Display
PC Programming
Data
Title
No.
¦+BTI
0 1 : P B R ( S L T / A A )
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
PBR 1
PBR 3
and 2
and 4
Default not assigned.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line key is pressed.

CO/PBX
Off
On
Line LED
The shaded area
indicates the default
setting.
Data
Single Line Telephone
A.A./DISA
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

When LK1 and LK2 are assigned to Automated Attendant/DISA, a PBR( )-U10 ETU must be installed in the system
when Single Line Telephones are used.
Programming Manual
1 - 221

Issue 7
Electra Elite
PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated
System Mode
Attendant/DISA
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the receiving level of the Push Button Receiver (PBR) at the
8
Automated Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
Data No.
Display
02
PBR
Data
No.
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
1/2
Data
¦+AU
0 2 : P B R
1
= 0 3
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KB to access the memory block.
3 Use the dial pad to change the data option. The information that can be entered Default Values (PBR 1 and 2)
includes:
Setting
Receiving
Setting Data Receiving Level
Data
Level
00 -33.0 dBm
01 -34.0 dBm
03
-36.0 dBm
02 -35.0 dBm
03 -36.0 dBm
04 -37.0 dBm
05 -38.0 dBm
06 -39.0 dBm
07 -40.0 dBm
08 -41.0 dBm
09 -42.0 dBm
10 -43.0 dBm
11 -44.0 dBm
12 -45.0 dBm
13 -46.0 dBm
14 -47.0 dBm
15 -48.0 dBm
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next PBR.
N
5
Enter next PBR, and press
to write data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When the Automated Attendant answers, the DTMF signal level from the calling party is reduced from the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). This memory block specifies the minimum detectable receiving level.
Setting Data 15 is the most sensitive.
2.
PBR 1 data is for Channels 1 and 2 and PBR 2 is for Channels 3 and 4 in the CPUB( )-U10 ETU/MBD-U10 Unit.
1 - 222
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Time Display (12h/24h) Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify either a 12-hour (00:00 to 11:59 a.m., noon to 11:59 p.m.) or
Submode
24-hour (00:00 to 23:59) time display.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Data
04
Title
PC Programming
0 4 : 1 2
H O U R
D I S P
¦+BM
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
12
24
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KD to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 223

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to allow or deny specific attendant features for each Class Of Service.
Submode
When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the features
designated as allow.
8
Data No.
Display
07
Class
Page
Data
No.
No.
PC Programming
No.
Title
(00~15)
(1~3)
¦+BTS
0 7 : C L S 1
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Night Mode
System Speed
Night Mode
Switching Per
Dial
Not Used
Switching
Tenant
Programming
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Automatic
Automated
Trunk-to-Trunk
Not Used
Not Used
Attendant/DISA
Transfer Set/
Set/Reset Mode
Reset
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Timed Alarm for
Call Forward
Password
System-Wide
Single Line
Set/Cancel from
(Outgoing
Reset
Telephone
Destination
Restriction)
Refer to Note 1
Set/Reset
Station
Refer to Note 2
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Forced Account
Code/
DISA Password DISA Password Weekend Mode
Authorization
Cancel
Confirmation
Per Tenant
Code
Programming
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Terminal
Exchange Mode
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Set
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
1 - 224
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter data.
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
Data
Deny
Allow
S
Press
to go to the next page.
T
Press
to go to the previous page.
N
4
Press
key. Data for Class 01 ~ 15 is displayed successively.
N
5
Press
to write the data for Class 15. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

1.
System-Wide Reset selection resets the following: Call Forward All Call, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message,
and Callback Request.
2.
Password (Outgoing Restriction) selection cancels Station Lockout and default password for another station.
3.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
4.
At default, stations 100 and 101 are in class 00. All other stations are in class 15.
5.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
Programming Manual
1 - 225

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Classes 00 ~ 15 are programmed in this memory block as feature restriction classes. In Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of
Service Feature Assignment) specify any class of service for each telephone to assign features the user can/cannot activate.

Corresponding
Default
Default
Function Name
CO/PBX Line Key
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Page 1
LK1
Night Mode Switching (System-Wide))
Allow
Deny
LK2
Night Mode Switching (Tenant)
Allow
Deny
LK3
System Speed Dial Programming
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK6
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK7
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Set/Reset) and
Allow
Deny
programming of Outgoing Numbers
LK8
Automated Attendant/DISA Mode (Set/Reset)
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Timed Alarm (Set/Reset) for Single Line Telephones
Allow
Deny
(From Attendant)
LK2
Call Forward All Call (Set/Reset) from Destination
Station, Call Forward CAR Keys, Call Forward All
Allow
Deny
Call Set, and Call Forward Busy/No Answer set
LK3
System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward
All Call, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message, and
Deny
Deny
Callback Request
LK4
Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for
Allow
Deny
another Station
LK5
DISA Password Cancel
Allow
Deny
LK6
DISA Password Confirmation
Allow
Deny
LK7
Automated Attendant Weekend Mode (Set/Reset)
Allow
Deny
Tenant
LK8
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Programming (S8000 or higher for Authorization
Allow
Deny
Code).
Page 3
LK1
Terminal Exchange Mode Set
Allow
Deny
LK2~LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
1 - 226
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 227

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to allow or deny specific station features for each Class of Service.
Submode
When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the features specified
as allow.
8
Data No.
Display
08
Class
Data
No.
Page No
PC Programming
No.
Title
(00~15)
(1~6)
¦+BTS
0 8 : C L S 2
( 0 0 )
| 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Call Forward
Automatic
Barge-In (Calling
All Call, DND,
Trunk Queuing
Callback
Party)
Break Mode
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Barge-In
Timed Alarm
Voice /
General
Receive
Set/Cancel
Tone Override
Purpose Relay
(Called Party)
From SLT
(Originate)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Absence
Callback
Station Outgoing
Not Used
Message
Request Set
Lockout Set
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Call Forward
VRS Voice
DISA Password
Busy/No Answer
Not Used
Message
Set
Set

Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
User Ringing
Voice/Tone
LCR/ARS
Not Used
Line Preference
Override
Bypass
Set/Reset
(Receive)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Station Trunk-to-
Account Code
Digit Restriction
Call Alert
Trunk Transfer
Entry
Time Selection
Notification
Page 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
DSS Key
ANI/Caller ID
LCR/ARS
Transfer
ANI/Caller ID
Number
Overflow
Operation
Selection
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Manual Live
Auto Live
Unsupervised
BGM Selection
Record Activate Record Activate
Conference
1 - 228
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Page 5
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Forced Account
Code /
Group Listening
Station
Set Call Forward
Authorization
Selection
Relocation
Off-Premise
Code
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
ANI/Caller ID
Pre-Set Dialing
Live Monitoring
Display
Not Used
Allow/Deny
Selection
Page 6
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
Unverified for
Forced Account
VMS Message
ARS Overflow
Code /
Not Used
Indication
Authorization
Code
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Caller ID for
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
K-CCIS
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + KH to access the memory block.
3
Enter Class No.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
4
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to allow or deny the feature selection.
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time CO/PBX line key is pressed.
CO/PBX
Off
On
Line Key LED
Data
Deny Allow

S
Press
to go to the next page.
T
Press
to go back to the previous page.
N
5
Press
key to transfer data.
6
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class. The next memory block is displayed.
P
7
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Programming Manual
1 - 229

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment

Notes

1.
Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while
restricting others.
2.
At default, all stations are in Class 00.
3.
Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature
Assignment).
4.
LCR/ARS Bypass (Page 3, LK 4) applies only when the station is assigned to an LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in
Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class Selection). LCR/ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to
directly access an ARS Table (Functions 601~604 ARS Tables 1~4) in Memory Blocks 1-1-46~48 [Access
Code (1/2/3-digit) Assignment].
5.
ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK 1) allows or restricts access to Trunk Group 01 when the first priority trunk group
(programmed route) is busy.
1 - 230
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Corresponding
Default
Default
Function Name
CO/PBX Line Key
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Page 1
LK1
Set Call Forward All Call, Do Not Disturb (DND),
Allow
Deny
Break Mode
LK2
Trunk Queuing
Allow
Deny
LK3
Automatic Callback
Allow
Deny
LK4
Barge-In Originate on a CO/PBX Line (Calling Party)
Deny
Deny
LK5
Barge-In Receive (Called Party)
Allow
Deny
LK6
Timed Alarm (Set/Cancel) From SLT
Allow
Deny
LK7
General Purpose Relay
Allow
Deny
LK8
Voice Override/Tone Override Originate
Allow
Deny
Page 2
LK1
Absence Message
Allow
Deny
LK2
Callback Request Originate
Allow
Deny
LK3
Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel)
Allow
Deny
LK4
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK5
Call Forward Busy/ No Answer Set
Allow
Deny
LK6
VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase
Allow
Deny
LK7
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK8
DISA Password Set
Allow
Deny
Page 3
LK1
Not Used
N/A
N/A
LK2
User Ringing Line Preference Set/Reset
Allow
Deny
LK3
Voice/Tone Override/Camp-On Receive
Allow
Deny
LK4
LCR/ARS Bypass (Trunk Groups 02~32)
Deny
Deny
LK5
Station Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Deny
Deny
LK6
Account Code Entry
Deny
Deny
LK7
Digit Restriction Time Selection
Allow
Allow
LK8
Call Alert Notification for DIT and DID
Allow
Deny
Programming Manual
1 - 231

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Corresponding
Default
Default
Function Name
CO/PBX Line Key
Class 00
Class 01 ~ 15
Page 4
LK1
LCR/ARS Recall
Allow
Deny
LK2
DSS Key Transfer Operation
Deny
Deny
LK3
ANI/Caller ID (S4500 or higher for ANI)
Deny
Deny
LK4
ANI/Caller ID Number/Name Selection (S4500 or
higher for ANI)
If deny is set, Name is displayed if Name and
Deny
Deny
number are received.
If allow is set, Number is displayed if Name and
number are received.
LK5
Manual Live Record Activate
Deny
Deny
(Memory Block 1-8-26 must be set.)
LK6
Auto Live Record Activate (LK5 must be on, and
Deny
Deny
Memory Block 1-8-26 must be set.)
LK7
BGM Selection
Allow
Deny
LK8
Unsupervised Conference
Deny
Deny
Page 5
LK1
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code (S8000
Deny
Deny
or higher for Authorization Code)
LK2
Group Listening Selection
Deny
Deny
LK3
Station Relocation
Allow
Deny
LK4
Set Call Forward Off- Premise
Deny
Deny
(Related to Page 1 LK1 and Page 2 LK5)
LK5
Pre-Set Dialing (Allow/Deny) (S2000 or higher)
Deny
Deny
LK6
Live Monitoring (S3000 or higher)
Deny
Deny
LK7
Caller ID Display Selection (S4000 or higher)
If allow is set, Caller ID Name and Number display
Deny
Deny
at the same time.
LK8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
Page 6
LK1
ARS Overflow (S4000 or higher)
Deny
Deny
LK2
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Deny
Deny
(S5000 or higher)
LK3
Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization
Code (S5000 or higher for Unverified) (S8000 or
Deny
Deny
higher for Authorization Code)
LK5
Caller ID for K-CCIS (S8000 or higher)
Allow
Deny
LK4,6~8
Not Used
N/A
N/A
1 - 232
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Music on Hold Pattern Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the Music on Hold pattern.
Submode
Display
8
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Data
Title
09
0 9 : M O H
= A
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
Medley A = American Folk Song Medley
Medley B = Christmas Song Medley

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 +KI to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
1-8-32
Hold Interval Tone Volume Selection

Notes

1.
Music on Hold can be provided to CO/PBX and intercom calls that are placed on hold.
2.
One of two melodies can be selected:
A = American Folk Song Medley
B = Christmas Song Medley
Programming Manual
1 - 233

Issue 7
Electra Elite
PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the interdigit release time for the Push Button Receiver
Submode
(PBR).
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
10
PC Programming
1 0 : P B R
R E L E A S
7 s
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
3s
4s
5s
6s
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
7s
8s
9s
10s

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-3-03
First Digit PBR Release Time Selection
1-8-01
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection

Notes

A DTMF Single Line Telephone connected to the Electra Elite 48/192 system must be supported by a PBR that
receives DTMF signals.
1 - 234
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Off-hook
Specified Time: 10 sec. Default
Dial Tone is sent (PBR connected)
Memory Block 1-3-03
9
Dial the first digit.
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default
Memory Block 1-8-10
7
Dial the second digit.
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default
Memory Block 1-8-10
5
Dial the third digit.
When the PBR is not detected in the specified time,
3
PBR is released.
Programming Manual
1 - 235

Issue 7
Electra Elite
System Refresh Time Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the System Refresh Time during idle periods.
Submode
Display
8
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
11
1 1 : R E F R E S H
4 H
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BM
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NON
4H
8H
12H
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
24H
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

The system automatically refreshes itself during idle periods based on the time specified in this memory block.
1 - 236
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
VRS Message Recording Time Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the recording time and number of messages for each Voice
Submode
Recording Service (VRS) channel.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
VRS
Setting
No.
Title
Chan.
Data
12
1 2 : V R S 1
1 5 s
x 1 6
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+AR
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
15s x16
30s x 8
60s x 4
120s x 2
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
.
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AB to access the memory block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values
All VRS Channels
Recording Time = 15 seconds,
16 messages
N
4 Press
to write the data and advance to the next VRS Channel.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the seven remaining VRS channels. The next memory block is then displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

Voice Recording Services Channel 1 has 240 seconds for message recording. The number of messages that can be
recorded depends on message length. Divide 240 by the message length to obtain number.
Programming Manual
1 - 237

Issue 7
Electra Elite
VRS Message Function Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the recorded voice prompt Delay Announcement/
Submode
Automated Attendant Message to the Voice Recording Service (VRS) Message number.
Refer to Memory Block 1-8-12 (VRS Message Recording Time Selection).
8
Data No.
Display
VRS
13
Channel Message
Data
No.
Setting
Title
(1~8)
No.
Page
PC Programming
No.
(1~16)
Data
No.
¦+AR
1 3 : V R S 1 / 0 1 = N O N | 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
M1
V1
V2
NON
(Delay
(Voice Prompt)
(Voice Prompt)
message)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
M2
(Delay mes-
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
sage)
Page 2
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
D1
D2
D3
D4
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
D5
D6
D7
D8
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
(Day A A)
Page 3
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
N1
N2
N3
N4
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
N5
N6
N7
N8
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
(Night A A)
Page 4
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
W1
W2
W3
W4
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
W5
W6
W7
W8
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
(Weekend A A)
1 - 238
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AC to access the memory block.
3
Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Value

All Channels of Block: No Message
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter VRS Channel and message number
S to go to the next page
T to go back to the previous page
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next message. After Message No. 16, the next VRS is displayed.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each message for each VRS. The next memory block is then displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Programming Manual
1 - 239

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign each system tone to the flexible tables.
Submode
Display
8
Table
Data No.
Data
No.
Setting Page
No.
(00~12)
Tone
Data
No.
15
1 5 : ( 0 0 ) D T
=
A | 1
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BI
Settings
Page 1
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
A
B
C
D
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
E
F
G
H
The shaded selection is the
Page 2
default.
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
I
J
K
L
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
M
Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.
S
Press
to alternate between pages.
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to the next table.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 240
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Default Table
Table Number
Tone
LCD
Default
00
ICM Dial Tone
DT
A
01
Second Dial Tone
2DT
B
02
Special Dial Tone
SPDT
C
03
Busy Tone
BT
D
04
Reorder/Error Tone
ROT
E
05
Howler Tone
HWT
F
06
Service Set Tone
SST
G
07
ICM Ringback Tone
RBT1
I
08
Tie/DID Ringback Tone
RBT2
H
09
Call Waiting Tone
CWT
J
10
LCR Dial Tone
SDTT
K
11
Tone Burst 1
TB1
G
12
Tone Burst 2
TB2
K
Programming Manual
1 - 241

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Tone Table
Tone
Frequency
Intermit
Cycle
A
350/440
Continuous
120 IPM
B
350/440
0.25 On, 0.25 Off
240 IPM
C
440
0.125 On, 0.125 Off
60 IPM
D
480/620
0.5 On, 0.5 Off
E
480/620
120 IPM
2400
F
16
Continuous
Modulation
G
440
Continuous
2 sec On
H
440/480
4 sec Off
1 sec On
I
440/480
2 sec Off
J
440
60 IPM
K
400
Continuous
L
800
60 IPM
M
No Tone
Continuous
1 - 242
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the voice prompt to each tone. Voice prompt is provided
Submode
only during the Internal Dial tone or Call Waiting tone.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Table
Tone
Setting
No.
No.
Name
Data
16
PC Programming
1 6 : 0 1 : D T
= P R 1
¦+AR
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
PR1
PR2
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.
Default Values

Table No. 1: Dial tone
Dial Tone: PR1
Table No. 2: Call Waiting tone
Call Waiting Tone: PR2
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to Table 02.
N
5
After entering Table 2 data, press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program the next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
Refer to Chapter 2 Guide to Feature Programming.
Programming Manual
1 - 243

Issue 7
Electra Elite
PC Programming Password Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign system password that must be entered when connecting to
Submode
the system using SAT PC Programming.
8
Display
Data No.
Class
Data
No.
Setting
17
No.
1,2
Data
PC Programming
1 7 : ( 1 ) =
¦+CSP
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AG to access the memory block.
3
Use the following to enter Class 1 (Technician Mode) and password (8 digits max.)
Default Values

Class 1, 2 All Blank
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Uto clear data
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to Class 2 (End User Mode).
N
5
After entering Class 2 password, press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
Password 1 (Class 1) is used for Technician SAT PC Programming.
2.
Password 2 (Class 2) is used for End User SAT PC Programming.
3.
Password 1 (Class 1) can be assigned only by telephone programming. It cannot be assigned or changed by
Technician or End User SAT PC Programming.
4.
Password 2 (Class 2) can be assigned by telephone programming or Technician SAT PC Programming. It
cannot be assigned or changed by End User SAT PC Programming.
5.
Password 2 (Class 2) cannot be assigned until Password 1 (Class1) is assigned in the memory block.
6.
The password for both classes can have up to five digits.
1 - 244
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Site Name Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a site name for PC Programming software to use to
Submode
program the system.
8
Display
Data No.
Class
Data
No.
Setting
18
No.
1,2
Data
PC Programming
1 8 : S I T E =
¦+CSN
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + AH to access the memory block.
3
Use Character Code Table in Section 9, and enter up to eight characters for Setting Data.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Uto clear data at cursor
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.

Notes

1.
When programmed, this assignment creates a directory in the PC after download is performed.
2.
System Software S4000 or higher allows the name to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII
Character Code Tables. Follow the procedure in Section 9 Character Assignment on page 1-702.
Programming Manual
1 - 245

Issue 7
Electra Elite
ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the Agent Station Number and the Automatic Call
Submode
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) Group Number where each agent is
assigned.
8
Data No.
Display
Data Title
Agent
Group
Station
25
No.
No.
No.
No.
(1~32)
(1~4)
4 Digits (max.)
PC Programming
2 5 : A G 0 1 / G P _ =
¦+AA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BE to access the memory block.
3
Setting data includes Group no. (1 ~ 4) and Station No. (4 digits max.)
Default Value

Not Specified
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Agent station number is one of the following:
·
2 digit (00 ~ 99)
·
3 digit (000 ~ 999)
·
4 digit (0000 ~ 9999)
N
4
Press
to write Group and Station No. and advance to next Agent number (1 ~ 32).
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3- or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1 - 246
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Notes

1.
UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system.
2.
ACD is not supported in the Electra Elite 48 system.
Programming Manual
1 - 247

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify a Voice Mail Master Hunt Number to operate Quick
Submode
Transfer to Voice Mail. This memory block also enables the voice mail display in the LCD of a
Multiline Terminal when a voice mail machine sets a message.
8
Data No.
Display
Agent
Data
Station
26
No.
Title
No.
PC Programming
2 6 : V M
M A S T E R 0 0 0
¦+AV
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BF to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter agent station No.
Default Value

Use the following to enter data:
Not Specified
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Agent station number is one of the following:
·
2 digit (00 ~ 99)
·
3 digit (000 ~ 999)
·
4 digit (0000 ~ 9999)
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 248
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7

Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment
1-1-48
Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment
1-2-03
2-, 3- or 4-Digit Station Number Selection
1-2-24
Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment
4-14
Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection
4-15
Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment
4-35
Voice Mail/SLT Selection
Programming Manual
1 - 249

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of digits for the Forced Account Code/
8
Authorization Code.
Data No.
System Software S8000 or higher is required for Authorization code.
27
Display
PC Programming
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
¦+BF
2 7 : F O R C E D
1 0 D G T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BG to access the memory block.
3
Enter the number of digits.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
10 Digits
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data: 01 ~ 13 digits
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
1 - 250
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-1-46
Access Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment
1-1-47
Function 146 Forced Account code/Authorization Code
1-1-48
Function 147 Forced Account code/Authorization Code Access
1-8-07
Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1
Page 2 LK8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Programming
1-8-08
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2
Page 5, LK1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
Page 6, LK3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code
4-07
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)
4-08
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)
4-17
Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment
4-64
Code Restriction Class (Without authorization Code) Day Mode Assignment
4-65
Code Restriction Class (Without authorization Code) Night Mode Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 251

Issue 7
Electra Elite
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number
System Mode
Assignment
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the SCD Pilot number for each group. Any valid unused
8
station number can be used.
Data No.
Display
Data
Group
Setting
29
No.
Title
No.
Data
PC Programming
2 9 : P I L O T
1
¦+AA
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + BI to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter an extension number.
Default Values

Not Assigned
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data = 2~4 digits
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to next Group No. (1~4).
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Group No. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-30
SCD Group Agent Assignment
1 - 252
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
SCD Group Agent Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign stations to one of four simplified call distribution groups. A
Submode
total of 32 stations can be assigned.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Agent

Grp.
Setting
No.
Title
1~32
1~4
Data
30
3 0 : S G
0 1
1 =
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+AA

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CK to access the memory block.
3
Use dial pad to enter Grp (1~4) and the Setting Data (station number) for each agent.
Default Values

Not Assigned
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data: Maximum of 4 digits
N
4
Press
to write the data and select the next Agent No.
5
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent No. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-29
SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 253

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Hold Tone Source Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign an internal or external Music on Hold source.
Submode
Display
8
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data
31
3 1 : H L D T
S R C
I N T
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
INT
EXT
The shaded selection is the
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CA to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the MOH source.
Default Values
INT
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-09
Music On Hold Pattern Selection
1-8-32
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
1 - 254
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
When the internal Music On Hold source is used, this memory block can be used to pad the
Submode
music by -6 dB.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
32
3 2 : H L D T
V O L
0 d B
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BCS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
0dB
-6dB
The shaded selection is the
default.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CB to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the dB setting.
Default Values
0 dB
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-31
Hold Tone Source Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 255

Issue 7
Electra Elite
Master Clock Selection
System Mode
1
General Description
When a DTI-U( ) ETU (T-1), PRT(1)-U( ) ETU, or BRT(4)-U10 ETU is installed, clocking must
Submode
be synchronized. When this memory block is set for cabinet 0 (default), the system is set to
be a Master Clock source. Programming this memory block defines the system to be a Slave
8
from its connected source.
Data No.

When the master clock selection is changed, the system should be reset by pressing the Reset
33
switch on the CPU for synchronization to reoccur.
Display
PC Programming
¦+AD
Data
Cabinet Slot
No.
Title
0~3
1~8
3 3 : M S T R C L C K
0 :
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CC to access the memory block.
3
Enter the number of digits.
Default Values

Cabinet 0 (Master System))
Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Example 1: (Elite 100 is Master Clock Source)
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
T1
T1
DTI
DTI
DTI
DTI
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(200)
(300)
(100)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 0
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Master
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
1 - 256
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Example 2: (The PSTN is Master Clock source)
Electra Elite
ISDN
Electra Elite
Electra Elite
PRI
T1
T1
DTI
PRT
DTI
DTI
DTI
PSTN
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 4
(100)
(200)
(300)
MB 1-8-33
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 1
Setting
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 1
(Slave)
(Slave)
(Slave)
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment

Notes

1.
When ISDN/T1 or ISDN/T1 and Wireless trunks are installed, confirm that Switch SW1 is set to the proper
position on the CLKG-U10 Unit (ISDN.PHS) and assign this memory block for proper Master Clock setting.
2.
When only Wireless is installed (No ISDN/T1), this memory block should be left at the default setting.
Programming Manual
1 - 257

Issue 7
Electra Elite
COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the baud rates for individual COM ports.
Submode
Display
8
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data
35
3 5 : B D R T
1 = 3 8 . 4
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+CSS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
The shaded selection is the
4.8
9.6
19.2
38.4
default. Baud Rates are in
Kbps.

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CE to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the baud rate for each COM port.
Default Values
COM 1 = 38.4
COM 2 = 4.8
COM 3 = 4.8 (Not Used)
COM 4 = 9.6
N
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection

Notes

COM 1 = PC Programming
COM 1 = LCR
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
COM 4 = Automatic Call Distribution (Not used by Electra Elite 48 system)
1 - 258
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the Parity and Stop bit for the individual COM ports.
Submode
Display
8
Data
Setting
Data No.
No.
Title
Data
36
3 6 : P / S
1 =
N O N / 1
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+CSS
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NON/1
NON/2
EVEN/1
ODD/1
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CF to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the parity and stop bit setting.
Default Values
COM 1 = Non/1
COM 2 = Non/1
COM 3 = Non/1
COM 4 = Non/1
N
4
Press
to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-5-13
Printer Connected Selection

Notes

COM 1 = PC Programming
COM 1 = LCR
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
COM 4 = Automatic Call Distribution (Not used by Electra Elite 48 system)
Programming Manual
1 - 259

Issue 7
Electra Elite
General Purpose Relay Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify whether or not the General Purpose Relays on the
Submode
ECR-U10 ETU are used.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Relay
Setting
No.
Title
No.0,1
Data
37
3 7 : R E L A Y ( 0 ) = N O
PC Programming
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+BP
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
NO
YS
The shaded selection is the
default.
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CG to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to specify whether or not relay 0 is used.
Default Values
NO
N
4
Press
to write the data and advance to relay 1.
N
5
Press
to write the data for relay 1. The next memory block is displayed.
P
6
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-6-05
Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection

Notes

These General Purpose Relays are normally open relays.
1 - 260
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Modem Number For Remote Programming
System Mode
Assignment
1
Submode
General Description
A socket modem can be installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU when it is installed in S1 or S2 of the
8
B64-U10 KSU or S2 of the B48-U10 KSU. Use this memory block to assign the extension
number for the socket modem.
Data No.
38
Display
Data
Setting
PC Programming
No.
Title
Data
¦+CSS
3 8 : M O D E M
=
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + CH to access the memory block.
3
Enter the number of digits.
Default Values

Use the following to enter data:
Not assigned
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data: Maximum of 4 digits
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
7-1
Card Interface Slot Assignment
Programming Manual
1 - 261

Issue 7
Electra Elite
ACD Hunt Time
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to assign the time for hunting among the Automatic Call Distribution/
Submode
Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) agents that do not answer an ACD/UCD call.
8
Display
Data No.
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
40
PC Programming
4 0 : A C D
T I M E R
1 0 S
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
¦+AA
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
10s
20s
30s
60s
The shaded selection is the
LK 5
LK 6
LK 7
LK 8
default.

120s
240s
(No Limit)

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DK to access the memory block.
3
Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the value.
Default Value
10 seconds
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-12-00
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment
1-12-01
ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment
1-12-02
ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection

Notes

ACD is not supported in the Electra Elite 48 system.
1 - 262
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this feature to define an available loop-start trunk as a CAMA or an ISDN PRI trunk.
Submode
When a user dials 911, the system seizes the E911 trunk and sends additional digits (CESID)
to enable the PSAP center to recognize the callback telephone number. The E911 trunk must
8
be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U10, COID(4)/(8)-U10, COIB(4)-U10/20, or COIB(8)-U10 Loop
Data No.
Start port and assigned to the system.
43
System Software S3000 or higher is required to support CAMA trunk.
PC Programming
System Software S4500 or higher is required to support ISDN PRI trunk.
¦+AE
Display
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
4 3 : 9 1 1
T R U N K
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DC to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to specify CO/PBX number to assign the CAMA trunk.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
Setting Data: CO/PBX 01~64 (Default not specified)
U
Press
to clear data.
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Programming Manual
1 - 263

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

1.
Only one CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk can be assigned per system.
2.
The E911 trunk can be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U10, COID(4)/(8)-U10, COIB(4)-U10/20, or COIB(8)-U10 ETU.
3.
Information provided to the E911 system is called Caller Emergency Service Identification (CESID) that can be a
7- to 10-digit number. Caller ID can be used instead of CESID. The E911 Operator data base uses Caller ID or
the CESID to provide a callback number and location for emergency response.
4.
To seize the E911 trunk:
¥
Dial 911 after receiving internal dial tone.
¥
Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with a line key.
¥
Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with an access code.
1 - 264
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized when
Submode
the E911 trunk is busy. Normally, this memory block is left unassigned.
8
System Software S3000 or higher is required.
Data No.
System Software S6000 or lower supports 16 Route Advance Blocks.
44
System Software S7000 or higher supports 32 Route Advance Blocks.
PC Programming
¦+AE
Display
Data No.
Setting
Title
Data
4 4 : 9 1 1 A L T
R T
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DD to access the memory block.
3
Enter the data.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear data
Setting Data: Not Specified No Alternate Route (default)

101~132 Trunk Group 01~32

201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-45
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Programming Manual
1 - 265

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.
1 - 266
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
System Mode
(Maintenance Busy)
1
General Description
Submode
Use this memory block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized when
8
the E911 trunk is in maintenance busy or trouble out of service.
Data No.
System Software S3000 or higher is required.
45
System Software S6000 or lower supports 16 Route Advance Blocks.
PC Programming
System Software S7000 or higher supports 32 Route Advance Blocks.
¦+AE
Display
Data No.
Setting
Title
Data
4 5 : 9 1 1
M N T
1 0 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y

Programming Procedures
1
Go off-line.
2
Press LK1 + LK8 + DE to access the memory block.
3
Use the dial pad to enter data.

Use the following to enter data:
J to move the cursor left
L to move the cursor right
K~Ito enter numeric data
U to clear data
Setting Data: Not Specified No Alternate Route (default)

101~132 Trunk Group 01~32

201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32
N
4
Press
to write the data. The next memory block is displayed.
P
5
Program next memory block or press
to go back on-line.
Related Programming
M.B. Number
Memory Block Name
1-8-43
Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment
1-8-44
Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment
1-8-46
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
4-54
Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table
Programming Manual
1 - 267

Issue 7
Electra Elite

Notes

1.
When the E911 trunk is maintenance busy or trouble out of service, E911 calls are routed to the trunk group
assigned by E911 Alternate Route Assignment.
2.
One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.
1 - 268
Multiline Terminal Programming

Electra Elite
Issue 7
Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment
System Mode
1
General Description
Use this memory block to specify the number of digits to be sent when a call is originated by
Submode
dialing 911.
8
System Software S3000 or higher is required.
Data No.
Display
46
Data
Setting
No.
Title
Data
PC Programming
¦+AE
4 6 : 9 1 1
D I A L
9 1 1
T I M E
D I S P L A Y
Settings
LK 1
LK 2
LK 3
LK 4
1
11